Konica Minolta Fax Machine C220 User Manual

User’s Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
Contents-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
Contents-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
Contents-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
Contents-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
Contents-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
Contents-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
Contents-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
Contents-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
Contents-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1.1  
Welcome  
1
1
Introduction  
1.1  
Welcome  
Thank you for purchasing this machine.  
This User's Guide describes the functions, operating instructions, precautions for correct operation, and sim-  
ple troubleshooting guidelines of this machine. In order to obtain maximum performance from this product  
and use it effectively, please read this User's Guide as necessary.  
1.1.1  
User's guides  
Printed manual  
Overview  
[Quick Guide Copy/Print/Fax/Scan/Box Opera-  
tions]  
This manual describes operating procedures and the  
functions that are most frequently used in order to en-  
able you to begin using this machine immediately.  
This manual contains notes and precautions that  
should be followed to ensure safe usage of this ma-  
chine.  
Please be sure to read this manual before using this  
machine.  
User's guide CD manuals  
Overview  
[User's Guide Copy Operations]  
This manual describes details on copy mode opera-  
tions and the settings of this machine.  
Specifications of originals and copy paper  
Copy function  
Maintaining this machine  
Troubleshooting  
[User's Guide Enlarge Display Operations]  
This manual describes details on operating proce-  
dures of the enlarge display mode.  
Copy function  
Scanning function  
G3 fax function  
Network fax function  
[User's Guide Print Operations]  
[User's Guide Box Operations]  
This manual describes details on printer functions.  
Printer function  
Setting the printer driver  
This manual describes details on the boxed functions  
using the hard disk.  
Saving data in user boxes  
Retrieving data from user boxes  
Transferring and printing data from user boxes  
[User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax  
Operations]  
This manual describes details on transmitting  
scanned data.  
E-mail TX, FTP TX, SMB TX, Save in User Box,  
WebDAV TX, Web Services  
G3 fax  
IP Address Fax, Internet Fax  
[User's Guide Fax Driver Operations]  
[User's Guide Network Administrator]  
This manual describes details on the fax driver func-  
tion that transmits faxes directly from a computer.  
PC-FAX  
This manual describes details on setting methods for  
each function using the network connection.  
Network settings  
Settings using PageScope Web Connection  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
1-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
1.1  
Welcome  
1
User's guide CD manuals  
Overview  
[User's Guide Advanced Function Operations]  
This manual describes details on functions that be-  
come available by registering the optional license kit  
and by connecting to an application.  
Web browser function  
Image panel  
PDF Processing Function  
Searchable PDF  
My panel and My address functions  
[Trademarks/Copyrights]  
This manual describes details on trademarks and  
copyrights.  
Trademarks and copyrights  
1.1.2  
User's Guide  
This User's Guide is intended for users ranging from those using this machine for the first time to administra-  
tors.  
It describes basic operations, functions that enable more convenient operations, simple troubleshooting op-  
erations, and various setting methods of this machine.  
Note that basic technical knowledge about the product is required to enable users to perform troubleshooting  
operation. Limit your troubleshooting operations to the areas explained in this manual.  
Should you experience any problems, please contact our service representative.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
1-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1.2  
Conventions used in this manual  
1
1.2  
Conventions used in this manual  
1.2.1  
Symbols used in this manual  
Symbols are used in this manual to express various types of information.  
The following describes each symbol related to correct and safe usage of this machine.  
To use this machine safely  
7 WARNING  
-
This symbol indicates that a failure to heed the instructions may lead to death or serious injury.  
7 CAUTION  
-
This symbol indicates that negligence of the instructions may lead to mishandling that may cause injury  
or property damage.  
NOTICE  
This symbol indicates a risk that may result in damage to this machine or documents.  
Follow the instructions to avoid property damage.  
Procedural instruction  
0
This check mark indicates an option that is required in order to use conditions or functions that are pre-  
requisite for a procedure.  
1
2
This format number "1" represents the first step.  
This format number represents the order of serial steps.  
The operation  
procedures are  
describedusing  
illustrations.  
% This symbol indicates a supplementary explanation of a pro-  
cedural instruction.  
%
This symbol indicates transition of the control panel to access a desired menu item.  
This symbol indicates a desired page.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
1-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
1.2  
Conventions used in this manual  
Reference  
1
d
This symbol indicates a reference.  
View the reference as required.  
Key symbols  
[ ]  
Key names on the touch panel or computer screen, or a name of user's guide are indicated by these brackets.  
Bold text  
This presents a key name, part name, product name or option name on the control panel.  
1.2.2  
Original and paper indications  
Original and paper sizes  
The following explains the indication for originals and paper described  
in this manual.  
When indicating the original or paper size, the Y side represents the  
width and the X side the length.  
Original and paper indications  
windicates the paper size with the length (X) being longer than the  
width (Y).  
vindicates the paper size with the length (X) being shorter than the  
width (Y).  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
1-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
2 Before using the Network  
functions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.1  
Information  
2
2
Before using the Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax  
functions  
This section describes necessary information you should be aware of before using the fax and scan functions  
of this machine.  
2.1  
Information  
7 CAUTION  
-
To turn the Main Power Switch off and on, first turn the main power off, and then on again after 10 or  
more seconds has elapsed. Not doing so may result in an operation failure.  
2.1.1  
Transmission function  
Function type  
Using this machine, scanned images can be sent or received via network or telephone line. This User's Guide  
introduces the following functions.  
Functions  
Transmission Options  
Network scan function  
E-Mail  
FTP  
SMB  
User Box  
WebDAV  
Web Service  
Fax function  
Sending and receiving G3 fax  
Polling  
Network fax function  
Internet Fax (I-FAX)  
IP Address Fax  
Notes on using fax functions (G3)  
Reference  
-
To use the fax function, the optional Fax Kit FK-502 is required.  
Fax data cannot be sent/received in color with this machine.  
This machine can connect to the following telephone lines.  
-
-
Subscribed telephone lines (including facsimile communication networks)  
PBX (Private Branch exchange, 2-wire)  
Check the following for the telephone line to be used.  
-
-
You cannot connect a business phone as an external telephone.  
If a digital dedicated line is multiplexed in an enterprise network, fax transmission speed may be limited,  
or the Super G3 fax may not be available.  
Communication error may occur on rare occasions due to the factory default setting. This is because the mul-  
tiplex device limits the frequency band of the line to the utmost limit based on the assumption that the line is  
intended for voice communication. Also, these restrictions differ depending on the device that make up the  
network. For details, contact your network administrator.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
2-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
2.1  
Information  
2
Notes on using Network Fax  
The following conditions are required to exist in order to use the Network Fax function.  
The machine is connected to the network. (required)  
The machine can be used over a TCP/IP network. First, connect the cable for connecting to the network.  
-
For details, refer to page 4-2. In order to use this machine on a network, settings such as the IP address of  
the machine must be specified. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator].  
Notes on using Internet Fax  
The following describes the precautions for using the Internet Fax.  
-
To use the Internet fax function, ask your service representative to configure settings. For details, con-  
tact your service representative.  
-
The following environment is required to use the Internet Fax function.  
The machine is connected to the network, capable of E-mail communications.  
The Internet FAX function is set to [ON] in [Network Fax Function Settings] of Administrator Settings.  
-
When an E-mail message is sent, the attachment file may be broken depending on the network status.  
Make sure the attachment file of the document is not broken after being sent.  
-
Even if the transmission result screen or the result area of an activity report indicates "----", due to a  
problem in an Internet pathway, the E-Mail message may not be delivered to the recipient. "----" indi-  
cates that the E-mail message was successfully delivered to the server. If the machine receives a mes-  
sage disposition notification (MDN), [OK] appears in the transmission result screen or the result column  
of an activity report. To send or receive important data, use the G3 fax function.  
d
Reference  
For details on [Network Fax Function Settings], refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator].  
Notes on using IP Address Fax  
The following describes the precautions for using the IP Address Fax.  
-
To use the IP Address Fax function, ask your service representative to configure settings. For details,  
contact your service representative.  
-
-
To use the IP Address Fax function, the optional Fax Kit FK-502 is required.  
An extension line cannot be used for the IP Address Fax function.  
2.1.2  
User authentication  
To use this machine, some devices have been preset so that you must enter an account or user name and a  
password. For details on the account or user name available for using the devices, contact your administra-  
tor.  
Reference  
-
If [Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error] in Administrator Settings is set to Mode 2 and a user  
enters an incorrect password the specified number of times, that user will be locked out and will no  
longer be able to use the machine. For details on unlocking restricted operations, contact your admin-  
istrator.  
-
If PageScope Authentication Manager is used for authentication, ask your server administrator about  
the login procedure.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
2-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
2.1  
Information  
2
MFP authentication  
Enter the user name and password, and then press either [Login] or the Access key on the control panel.  
External server authentication  
Enter the user name, password and server name, and then press either [Login] or the Access key on the con-  
trol panel.  
Account Track  
Enter the account name and password, and then press either [Login] or the Access key on the control panel.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
2-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
2.1  
Information  
2
2.1.3  
Restriction on file name  
There are following restrictions on file name.  
-
-
-
-
-
Document data that is saved can be given a name.  
The names can contain up to 30 characters.  
You can edit the names after the documents have been saved.  
You can specify the name when saving data. Otherwise, a predefined name is applied to the data.  
If the data is saved without a name specified, names are created by combining the following elements.  
As an example, the document name "SKMBT_C36009102315230" is described.  
Item  
Description  
S
This character indicates the mode when the docu-  
ment is saved.  
C: Copy  
S: Fax/Scan, User Box  
P: Print  
KMBT_C360  
This represents the name of the device that  
scanned the data. The factory default is  
"KMBT_(product name)". You can change this  
name in [Device Name] in [Administrator/Machine  
Settings] in Administrator Settings. Use up to 10  
characters.  
09102315230  
_0001  
This indicates the year (last two digits), month, day,  
hour and minutes when the data was scanned. The  
last digit is a serial number if the document is part  
of a series of scans.  
This indicates the page when multi-page data is  
scanned. This numeral does not appear in "File  
Name" screen; however, it is added automatically  
as part of the name when the file is transmitted.  
Consider this part for FTP or other transmission  
when a server has restriction regarding file names.  
.TIF  
This is the extension for the specified data format.  
The characters do not appear beside "File Name",  
but is added automatically as part of the name  
when the file is transmitted.  
Reference  
"S" appears for documents saved in the Fax/Scan mode screen or the User Box screen.  
-
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
2-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2.2  
Overview  
2
2.2  
Overview  
2.2.1  
Available operations with Network scan function  
"Scanning" refers to the operation of reading the image of an original fed through the ADF or placed on the  
original glass. The scanning functions can be used to temporarily store the scan data on the internal memory  
of the machine and transmit the data over the network.  
E-Mail transmission  
Scanned data can be sent to the specified E-mail address. Select destinations from the touch panel of this  
machine, and send scanned data as an E-mail attachment.  
1
4
8
2
3
5
6
7
1. Original  
2. Main unit  
3. Memory  
4. E-mail + scanned data  
5. SMTP server  
6. POP server  
7. Intranet/Internet  
8. Receive E-mail message  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
2-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
2.2  
Overview  
2
FTP transmission  
Upload scanned data to the specified FTP server. Enter the FTP server address and login password from the  
touch panel of this machine.  
Data uploaded to the FTP server can be downloaded from a computer on the network.  
1
4
7
2
3
5
6
1. Original  
2. Main unit  
3. Memory  
4. Scanned data  
5. FTP server  
6. Intranet/Internet  
7. Download  
SMB transmission  
Scanned data can be sent to a shared folder on a specified computer. Enter the intended host name, file path  
and other information from the touch panel of this machine.  
1
4
5
2
3
1. Original  
2. Main unit  
3. Memory  
4. Scanned data  
5. Save to shared folder  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
2-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2.2  
Overview  
2
User Box filing  
The scan data can be saved in a User Box created on the hard disk of this machine, allowing the data to be  
reused. The file name can be entered from the touch panel of this machine when the data is saved.  
In addition, received fax data can be saved in the User Box. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Box Oper-  
ations].  
1
2
1. Main unit  
2. Hard disk  
WebDAV transmission  
Upload scanned data to the specified server. Enter the server address and login password from the touch  
panel of this machine.  
The data uploaded to the server can be downloaded from a computer on the network.  
1
4
7
2
3
5
6
1. Original  
2. Main unit  
3. Memory  
4. Scanned data  
5. Server  
6. Intranet/Internet  
7. Download  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
2-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2.2  
Overview  
2
Web Service  
If the driver is installed to a computer (Windows Vista) on the network while the computer recognizes this  
machine, scan operation can be commanded from the computer, and data can be scanned using this ma-  
chine depending on the purpose and sent to the computer.  
1
2
4
3
1. Windows Vista  
2. Command scan operation  
3. Scanned data  
4. Original  
Reference  
-
This function is not available if the optional Image Controller IC-412 v1.1 is installed.  
2.2.2  
Available operations with fax function  
Sending/receiving G3 fax  
G3 fax can be sent or received. Destinations can be selected from the touch panel of this machine for broad-  
cast transmission. Also, some of the edit functions that are available for Scan can be added when sending a  
fax.  
1
2
1. Send  
2. Receive  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
2-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
2.2  
Overview  
2
Polling  
By sending a polling command, original data can be received from the sender's fax machine (Polling RX), and  
also, original data to be sent with sender's command can be registered beforehand (Polling TX). For polling  
TX, data can be saved either in the Polling Transmission User Box or Bulletin Board User Box.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
1. Receive  
2. Send  
3. Bulletin board  
4. View  
5. Register  
6. Polling  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
2-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2.2  
Overview  
2
2.2.3  
Available operations with Network function  
Internet Fax  
Scanned data will be sent and received as an E-mail attachment (TIFF format) via intranet (in-house network)  
or Internet. Because a communication is performed over an intranet or the Internet, related costs can be  
much lower than those required for sending a typical fax. Specify the E-mail address of the destination in  
order to send data.  
1
2
6
7
4
5
3
1. Original  
2. E-mail + Attachment (TIFF format)  
3. Intranet/Internet  
4. SMTP server  
5. POP server  
6. Receive E-mail  
7. Receive Internet Fax  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
2-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2.2  
Overview  
2
IP Address Fax  
IP Address Fax means FAX that is available on the IP network. To send scanned data, specify any of the IP  
address, host name or E-mail address of the recipient.  
IP Address Fax is different from G3 fax or Internet Fax in the following aspects.  
-
-
-
-
To send and receive image data, use the SMTP protocol.  
This function is available via the intranet (in-house network) only.  
It does not require a mail server as is required by Internet Fax.  
Fax can be sent or received in color. (Only the differences from G3 fax)  
2
3
1
1. Intranet  
2. Send  
3. Receive  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
2-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3 Control Panel/Liquid Crystal  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.1  
Control panel  
3
3
Control Panel/Liquid Crystal Display  
This section explains the functions of the control panel and liquid crystal display (touch panel) used to operate  
this machine.  
3.1  
Control panel  
Use the control panel for the fax/scan operation. The following describes the buttons and switches of the  
control panel.  
1
2
3
4
22  
21  
5
20  
19  
6
7
18  
17  
8
9
16  
15  
141312  
1110  
No.  
Name  
Description  
1
Touch Panel  
Various screens and messages are displayed.  
Configure the various settings by directly touch-  
ing the panel.  
2
3
Power Indicator  
Lights up in blue when the machine is turned on  
with the main power switch.  
Sub Power Switch  
Press this switch to turn on/off machine opera-  
tions, including copying, printing and scanning.  
When turned off, the machine enters an energy  
conservation state.  
4
5
Power Save  
Press this key to enter Power Save mode. While  
the machine is in Power Save mode, the indicator  
on the Power Save key lights up in green and the  
touch panel goes off. To exit from Power Save  
mode, press the Power Save key again.  
Mode Memory  
Press to register (store) the desired copy/scan  
settings as a program or to recall a registered  
copy/scan program.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
3-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
3.1  
Control panel  
3
No.  
Name  
Description  
6
Utility/Counter  
Press to display the Utility screen and the Meter  
Count screen.  
7
8
Reset  
Press to clear all settings (except programmed  
settings) entered using the control panel and  
touch panel.  
Interrupt  
Press this key to enter Interrupt mode. While the  
machine is in Interrupt mode, the indicator on the  
Interrupt key lights up in green and the message  
[Now in Interrupt mode.] appears on the touch  
panel. To cancel Interrupt mode, press the Inter-  
rupt key again.  
9
Stop  
Pressing the Stop key during scanning temporar-  
ily stops the scan operation.  
10  
Proof Copy  
Press this key to print a single proof copy to be  
checked before printing a large number of copies.  
You can check the finishing state on the touch  
panel by pressing this key before scanning or  
copying.  
11  
Start  
Press this key to start scanning. When this ma-  
chine is ready to begin a scan operation, the indi-  
cator on the Start key lights up in blue. If the  
indicator on the Start key lights up in orange,  
scan operation cannot be started.  
Press this key to restart a stopped job.  
12  
13  
Data Indicator  
Flashes in blue while a print job is being received.  
Lights up in blue when data is being printed.  
C (Clear)  
Press to erase a value (such as the number of  
copies, a zoom ratio, or a size) entered using the  
keypad.  
14  
15  
Keypad  
Press this key to enter the number of copies,  
zoom ratio, and various other settings.  
Guidance  
Press this key to display the Guidance screen.  
From this screen, you can view descriptions of  
the various functions and details of operations.  
16  
Enlarge Display  
Press to enter Enlarge Display mode. If you use  
PageScope Authentication Manager for authenti-  
cation, the Enlarge Display screen is not availa-  
ble.  
17  
18  
Accessibility  
Access  
Press this key to display the screen for configur-  
ing settings for user accessibility functions.  
If user authentication or account track settings  
have been applied, press this key after entering  
the user name and password (for user authentica-  
tion) or the account name and password (for ac-  
count track) in order to use this machine. Press  
this key to log off from the machine as well.  
19  
20  
Brightness dial  
Use this dial to adjust the brightness of the touch  
panel.  
User Box  
Press this key to enter User Box mode.  
While the machine is in User Box mode, the indi-  
cator on the User Box key lights up in green. For  
details, refer to the [User's Guide Box Opera-  
tions].  
21  
Fax/Scan  
Press this key to enter Fax/Scan mode.  
While the machine is in Fax/Scan mode, the indi-  
cator on the Fax/Scan key lights up in green.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
3-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
3.1  
Control panel  
3
No.  
Name  
Copy  
Description  
22  
Press this key to enter Copy mode. (The machine  
is in Copy mode in default.)  
While the machine is in Copy mode, the indicator  
on the Copy key lights up in green. For details, re-  
fer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations].  
7 CAUTION  
-
Do not apply extreme pressure to the touch panel, otherwise the touch panel may be scratched or dam-  
aged. Never push down on the touch panel with force, and never use a hard or pointed object to make  
a selection in the touch panel.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
3-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3.2  
Touch panel  
3
3.2  
Touch panel  
3.2.1  
Screen component  
1
2
4
5
3
No.  
Name  
Description  
1
Message display area  
Displays the status of the machine and details on  
operation procedures.  
2
Functions/settings display area  
Displays tabs and buttons for displaying screens  
containing various functions. Use this area to  
configure various functions. Press a tab or button  
to display the corresponding screen for configur-  
ing the settings.  
3
4
Icon display area  
Left panel  
Displays icons indicating the status of jobs and  
the machines.  
Displays various buttons, such as [Job List] to  
display the jobs that are currently being per-  
formed/queued (waiting) to be performed, and  
[Check Job] to display the result of the specified  
settings.  
For details on the display and description of the  
left panel, refer to page 3-7.  
5
Toner supply indicators  
Show the amount of toner remaining for yellow  
(Y), magenta (M), cyan (C), and black (K).  
Icons that appear in the touch panel  
Icons indicating the status of this machine may appear in the icon display area. The following icons may be  
displayed.  
Icon  
Description  
Indicates that data is being sent from the machine, regardless of the current  
mode.  
Indicates that the machine is receiving data, regardless of the current mode.  
Indicates that an error occurred during an image stabilization operation, a  
print operation or a scan operation.  
Press this icon to view a screen containing a warning code.  
If the warning screen has been closed while a warning occurs, press this but-  
ton to display the warning screen again.  
Appears when there is a message indicating that consumables must be re-  
placed or the machine requires maintenance. Press this icon to display the  
message, and then perform the replacement or maintenance procedure.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
3-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
3.2  
Touch panel  
Icon  
3
Description  
Appears when an error occurs with the connection to the POP server.  
Indicates that there is no paper in the paper tray.  
Indicates that very little paper remains in the paper tray.  
If the optional Image Controller IC-412 v1.1 is installed, press this icon to  
display the setting screen for the Image Controller IC-412 v1.1.  
Indicates that the enhanced security mode is enabled.  
Indicates that an external memory device is connected to the machine.  
Indicates that a nonstandard external memory has been connected to this  
machine, therefore, USB connection is not enabled.  
Indicates that the job is in the waiting-for-redial status because, for example,  
the recipient's line is busy when sending with the G3 Fax or IP Address Fax  
function.  
3.2.2  
Difference of screen display with/without optional devices  
The information displayed on the screen varies depending on whether the optional Fax Kit FK-502 is installed  
or not.  
If the Fax Kit FK-502 is not installed  
Fax destinations or functions related to fax operation are not displayed.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
3-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3.2  
Touch panel  
3
If the Fax Kit FK-502 is installed  
[Off-Hook] is displayed to enable you to dial in the off-hook mode. In addition, the [Direct Input] tab and the  
Communication Settings screen allow you to configure settings related to fax transmission.  
3.2.3  
Display and operation of Left panel  
In the left panel of the touch panel, there are buttons for checking the status of jobs and the configuration of  
the machine. The following buttons are available in the left panel in Scan/Fax mode.  
1
2
No.  
Name  
Description  
1
[Job List]  
Press this button to check the job currently being  
performed and the job log.  
2
[Check Job]  
Allows you to check information of the selected  
User Box, and various settings of the scan, print  
and transmission functions.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
3-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
3.2  
Touch panel  
3
Job List  
A command to perform an operation such as saving data to a User Box, or printing or sending saved docu-  
ments is called a job. Press [Job List] to display the job currently being performed.  
Job List - Delete  
Press this button to delete the job in process to cancel the operation. Select the job from the job list, and then  
press [Delete]. Check the message that appears, and delete the job.  
Job List - Job Details  
Press [Job Details] to view the list of the Current Jobs and Job History in the right side area. There are the  
following four types of jobs.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
3-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
3.2  
Touch panel  
3
Item  
Description  
[Print]  
Lists print jobs for copying, computer printout, and  
received faxes.  
[Send]  
Lists scanner and fax transmission jobs.  
Lists fax reception jobs.  
[Receive]  
[Save]  
Lists jobs with documents being saved in User  
Boxes.  
<Current Jobs of [Print]>  
Item  
Description  
List items  
[No.]: Job identification number assigned when the  
job is queued.  
[User Name]: The user name or user name/account  
name of the user who stored the document.  
[Status]: The status of the job (receiv-  
ing/queued/printing/printing stopped/print er-  
ror/saving to memory) is displayed.  
[Document Name]: File name being printed.  
If user authentication settings have been ap-  
plied, the names of documents are not dis-  
played for other users.  
The names of confidential documents are not  
displayed.  
[Time Stored]: The time that the job was queued.  
[Org.]: Displays the number of pages in the original.  
[Copies]: Displays the number of copies to be  
printed.  
[
][  
]
When there are more than the upper limit of seven  
jobs to be displayed at one time, press these but-  
tons to display other jobs.  
[Delete]  
Press this button to delete the selected job.  
[Increase Priority]  
Press this button to change the priority of the job.  
If you set Changing Job Priority in Administrator  
Settings to [Restrict], you cannot specify the  
output priority of the jobs.  
If the setting is specified so that the current  
print job can be interrupted, printing is inter-  
rupted and printing of the job given priority be-  
gins. Printing of the interrupted job restarts  
automatically once printing for the job given pri-  
ority is finished.  
[Release Held Job]  
[Check Job Set.]  
Press this button to change the settings of a stored  
job, or print or delete the job.  
Press this button to check the settings of the se-  
lected job. Press either [  
to check the settings.  
Back] or [Forward  
]
[Detail]  
Press this button to check the registration  
source/user name, file name, output tray, stored  
time, number of original pages and number of cop-  
ies for the selected job. To delete a job, press [De-  
lete].  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
3-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
3.2  
Touch panel  
<Job History of [Print]>  
3
Displays the history of printed jobs.  
Item  
Description  
List items  
[No.]: Job identification number assigned when the  
job is queued.  
[User Name]: The user name or user name/account  
name of the user who stored the document.  
[Document Name]: File name being printed.  
If user authentication settings have been ap-  
plied, the names of documents are not dis-  
played for other users.  
The names of confidential documents are not  
displayed.  
[Time Stored]: The time that the job was queued.  
[Org.]: Displays the number of pages in the original.  
[Copies]: Displays the number of copies to be  
printed.  
[Result]: Displays the result of the operation (com-  
pleted successfully/deleted due to error/deleted by  
user/part of mode cancelled).  
[
][  
]
When there are more than the upper limit of seven  
jobs to be displayed at one time, press these but-  
tons to display other jobs.  
[Deleted Jobs]/[Finished Jobs]/[All Jobs]  
[Detail]  
Switch to display each job type.  
Allows you to check the job result, error details,  
registration source/user name, document name,  
output tray, stored time, number of document pag-  
es and number of copies for the selected job.  
Reference  
-
When [Job History Thumbnail Display] is set to [ON] in the setting menu, if a history is selected from the  
list, the image in the first page is displayed in the area on the left.  
d
Reference  
For details on [Job History Thumbnail Display], refer to page 10-11.  
<Current Jobs of [Send]>  
Item  
Description  
List items  
[No.]: Job identification number assigned when the  
job is queued.  
[Address Type]: Destination type (including fax, E-  
Mail, FTP, PC (SMB), WebDAV, and TWAIN).  
[Status]: Displays the status of the job (send-  
ing/queued/dialing/pending for redial).  
[Address]: Displays the fax number, E-mail ad-  
dress, User Box name, etc. of the recipient's ma-  
chine.  
[Time Stored]: The time that the job was queued.  
[Org.]: Displays the number of pages in the original.  
[
][  
]
When there are more than the upper limit of seven  
jobs to be displayed at one time, press these but-  
tons to display other jobs.  
[Timer TX Job]  
[L1][L2]  
Displays the status of the reserved transmission in  
the memory. To delete a job, press [Delete].  
Displays if 2 units of the Fax Kit FK-502 are in-  
stalled. Press one of these buttons. The job list of  
the selected line appears.  
[Delete]  
Press this button to delete the selected job.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
3-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
3.2  
Touch panel  
3
Item  
Description  
[Redial]  
Select a job of which the status is set to [Waiting To  
Redial], to perform redialing.  
[Check Job Set.]  
Press this button to check the settings of the se-  
lected job. Press either [  
to check the settings.  
Back] or [Forward  
]
[Detail]  
Press this button to check the registration  
source/user name, file name, destination type,  
destination, stored time, transmission, number of  
original pages and external server information for  
the selected job. To delete a job, press [Delete].  
If user authentication settings have been ap-  
plied, the names of documents are not dis-  
played for other users.  
The names of confidential documents are not  
displayed.  
The external server information that is available  
by pressing [Detail] appears only when using  
external server authentication.  
[TWAIN] appears for the job that is sent via Web  
service.  
[Type] is displayed only when the destination is  
a fax, Internet fax, or IP address fax.  
<Job History of [Send]>  
Displays the history of the jobs sent by fax or scan.  
The job that is transferred or relayed to another device upon reception of fax data, also appears in the Job  
History of [Send].  
Item  
Description  
List items  
[No.]: Job identification number assigned when the  
job is queued.  
[Address Type]: Destination type (including fax, E-  
Mail, FTP, PC (SMB), WebDAV, and TWAIN).  
[Address]: Displays the fax number, E-mail ad-  
dress, User Box name, etc. of the recipient's ma-  
chine.  
[Time Stored]: The time that the job was queued.  
[Org.]: Displays the number of pages in the original.  
[Result]: Displays the result of the operation (com-  
pleted successfully/deleted due to error/deleted by  
user).  
[
][  
]
When there are more than the upper limit of seven  
jobs to be displayed at one time, press these but-  
tons to display other jobs.  
[Deleted Jobs]/[Finished Jobs]/[All Jobs]  
[Comm. List]  
Switch to display each job type.  
Displays the list of scanner and fax transmission  
(sent/received) jobs. You can print Activity Report,  
TX Report and RX Report in respective list screens.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
3-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
3.2  
Touch panel  
3
Item  
Description  
[Detail]  
Press this button to check the result, error details,  
registration source/user name, file name, destina-  
tion type, stored time, transmission, number of  
original pages and external server information for  
the selected job.  
If user authentication settings have been ap-  
plied, the names of documents are not dis-  
played for other users.  
The names of confidential documents are not  
displayed.  
The external server information that is available  
by pressing [Detail] appears only when using  
external server authentication.  
[TWAIN] appears for the job that is sent via Web  
service.  
[Communication] is displayed only when the  
destination is a fax, Internet fax, or IP address  
fax.  
Reference  
-
When [Job History Thumbnail Display] is set to [ON] in the setting menu, if a history is selected from the  
list, the image in the first page is displayed in the area on the left.  
<Current Jobs of [Receive]>  
Item  
Description  
List items  
[No.]: Job identification number assigned when the  
job is queued.  
[User Name]: The user name or user name/account  
name of the user who stored the document.  
[Status]: The status of the job (receiving/dialing  
(PollingRX)/queued/printing/printingstopped/print  
error/saving to memory).  
[Document Name]: The name of the received or  
saved document.  
[Time Stored]: The time that the job was queued.  
[Org.]: The number of original pages that were re-  
ceived.  
[
][  
]
When there are more than the upper limit of seven  
jobs to be displayed at one time, press these but-  
tons to display other jobs.  
[Delete]  
[Redial]  
Press this button to delete the selected job.  
Select a job of which the status is set to [Waiting To  
Redial], to perform redialing.  
[Forward]  
Forwards the fax received and stored in the mem-  
ory (in-memory proxy reception). Specify the recip-  
ients either by selecting destinations registered in  
the address book or by entering directly.  
[Detail]  
Press this button to check the registration  
source/user name, file name, output tray, stored  
time, transmission time, and number of original  
pages for the selected job. To delete a job, press  
[Delete].  
If user authentication settings have been ap-  
plied, the names of documents are not dis-  
played for other users.  
The names of confidential documents are not  
displayed.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
3-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
3.2  
Touch panel  
3
<Job History of [Receive]>  
Displays the history of fax transmission (received/transferred/relayed) jobs.  
Item  
Description  
List items  
[No.]: Job identification number assigned when the  
job is queued.  
[User Name]: The user name or user name/account  
name of the user who stored the document.  
[Document Name]: The name of the received or  
saved document.  
If user authentication settings have been ap-  
plied, the names of documents are not dis-  
played for other users.  
The names of confidential documents are not  
displayed.  
[Time Stored]: The time that the job was queued.  
[Org.]: Displays the number of pages in the original.  
[Result]: Displays the result of the operation (Job  
Complete/Deleted Due To Error/Deleted by Us-  
er/Reset Modes).  
[
][  
]
When there are more than the upper limit of seven  
jobs to be displayed at one time, press these but-  
tons to display other jobs.  
[Deleted Jobs]/[Finished Jobs]/[All Jobs]  
[Comm. List]  
Switch to display each job type.  
Displays the list of scanner and fax transmission  
(sent/received) jobs. You can print Activity Report,  
TX Report and RX Report in respective list screens.  
[Detail]  
Press this button to check the job result, error de-  
tails, registration source/user name, file name, out-  
put tray, stored time and number of original pages  
for the selected job.  
Reference  
-
When [Job History Thumbnail Display] is set to [ON] in the setting menu, if a history is selected from the  
list, the image in the first page is displayed in the area on the left.  
<Current Jobs of [Save]>  
Item  
Description  
List items  
[No.]: Job identification number assigned when the  
job is queued.  
[User Name]: The user name or user name/account  
name of the user who stored the document.  
[Status]: The status of the job (receiving, saving to  
memory, deleting).  
[Document Name]: The name of the saved docu-  
ment.  
If user authentication settings have been ap-  
plied, the names of documents are not dis-  
played for other users.  
The names of confidential documents are not  
displayed.  
[Time Stored]: The time that the job was queued.  
[Org.]: Displays the number of pages in the original.  
[
][  
]
When there are more than the upper limit of seven  
jobs to be displayed at one time, press these but-  
tons to display other jobs.  
[Delete]  
[Detail]  
Press this button to delete the selected job.  
Press this button to check the registration  
source/user name, file name, User Box, stored  
time, and number of original pages for the selected  
job. To delete a job, press [Delete].  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
3-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
3.2  
Touch panel  
3
<Job History of [Save]>  
A list of the documents saved in the User Box.  
The job that is received with the memory reception or confidential reception functions also appears in the Job  
History of [Save].  
Item  
Description  
List items  
[No.]: Job identification number assigned when the  
job is queued.  
[User Name]: The user name or user name/account  
name of the user who stored the document.  
[Document Name]: The name of the saved docu-  
ment.  
If user authentication settings have been ap-  
plied, the names of documents are not dis-  
played for other users.  
The names of confidential documents are not  
displayed.  
[Time Stored]: The time that the job was queued.  
[Org.]: Displays the number of pages in the original.  
[Result]: Displays the result of the operation (Job  
Complete/Deleted Due To Error/Deleted by Us-  
er/Reset Modes).  
[
][  
]
When there are more than the upper limit of seven  
jobs to be displayed at one time, press these but-  
tons to display other jobs.  
[Deleted Jobs]/[Finished Jobs]/[All Jobs]  
[Comm. List]  
Switch to display each job type.  
Displays the list of scanner and fax transmission  
(sent/received) jobs. You can print Activity Report,  
TX Report and RX Report in respective list screens.  
[Detail]  
Press this button to check the result, error details,  
registration source/user name, file name, destina-  
tion User Box, stored time and number of original  
pages for the selected job.  
Reference  
-
When [Job History Thumbnail Display] is set to [ON] in the setting menu, if a history is selected from the  
list, the image in the first page is displayed in the area on the left.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
3-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
3.2  
Touch panel  
3
Check Job - Check Job Settings  
Press [Check Job Set.]. The [Check Job Settings] is displayed.  
Press [Check Job Settings] to check the following settings.  
-
-
-
-
-
Destination Settings  
Check Scan Settings  
Check Original Settings  
Communication Settings  
Check E-Mail Settings  
Check Job - Check Job Settings - Destination Settings  
Displays the list of destinations that are registered in the machine.  
-
To add the directly entered address to the address book, select the destination, and press [Store Ad-  
dress].  
-
-
To check the detailed information of the destination, select a destination, and press [Details].  
To delete a destination, select one you want to delete, and then press [Delete].  
Check Job - Check Job Settings - Scan Settings  
You can check the details of scan settings (basic setting, scan setting and application setting). Press either  
[
Back] or [Forward  
] to check.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
3-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
3.2  
Touch panel  
3
Check Job - Check Job Settings - Original Settings  
You can check the original settings  
Check Job - Check Job Settings - Communication Settings  
You can check the line settings and transmission method settings. Press either [  
check.  
Back] or [Forward  
] to  
Check Job - Check Job Settings - Check E-Mail Settings  
You can check the document name, subject, From address and message body to send E-mail messages.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
3-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4 Registering the basic  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.1  
To begin operation  
4
4
Registering the basic information  
This section explains the necessary settings and registrations before using the fax and scan functions of this  
machine.  
4.1  
To begin operation  
The following registrations are required in order to use this machine.  
4.1.1  
Environment and device requirements  
The following environment and devices must be prepared to use various functions of this machine.  
Functions  
Environment and device  
Network scan function  
Connection to network  
Network settings  
G3 fax function  
Optional Fax Kit FK-502 installed  
Connection of modular cable  
Network fax function  
Internet Fax  
Connection to network  
Network settings  
IP Address Fax  
Optional Fax Kit FK-502 installed  
Connection to network  
Network settings  
4.1.2  
Network connection and settings  
Connection to the network and the network settings are required to use the function of this machine that  
sends image data over the network, such as the Network Scan and Network Fax functions.  
Connection to network  
Connect a UTP cable (category 5 or later recommended) connected to the network to the Ethernet connector  
on the machine.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
4-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
4.1  
To begin operation  
4
Network settings  
An IP address must be assigned to the machine and settings, such as the SMTP server, must be specified in  
order to use the machine on the network. For the detailed procedure, refer to the [User's Guide Network Ad-  
ministrator].  
Specifying an E-mail address for this machine  
An E-mail address must be registered to this machine to send scanned data via E-mail or to use the Internet  
Fax function. This E-mail address is used for sending/receiving data. It is recommended that the E-mail ad-  
dress registered for the administrator be used.  
If the E-mail address registered for the administrator is not specified, the sender's E-mail address must be  
entered for each Scan to E-mail operation. Note that Scan to E-mail operations are not possible if a From  
address is not entered.  
Reference  
-
If User Authentication is enabled, the E-mail address specified for each user will be From address.  
d
Reference  
For details on setting the E-mail address for this machine, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator].  
4.1.3  
Connection of modular cable  
To send/receive G3 fax that use the telephone line, connect the modular cable to this machine. To use the  
G3 fax function, the optional Fax Kit FK-502 must be installed onto the machine. To use two telephone lines,  
one more optional Fax Kit FK-502 must be installed onto the machine. In this case, two modular cables must  
be connected.  
Connect one end of the modular cable to the telephone adapter, and the other end to the predetermined con-  
nector of this machine. For details on the connector location, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations].  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
4-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4.2  
Store Address  
4
4.2  
Store Address  
The destinations (recipients) for fax or scan data can be registered. It can be registered in either of the fol-  
lowing ways.  
-
-
Using the touch panel of the machine  
Using PageScope Web Connection from a computer on the network  
4.2.1  
Address Book  
The following types of one-touch destinations can be registered. For details on address book registration,  
refer to page 9-2.  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
E-Mail  
User Box  
Fax  
PC (SMB)  
FTP  
WebDAV  
IP Address Fax  
Internet fax transmission  
Reference  
Web service destinations cannot be registered with an address book. Enter directly the Web service  
destination instead.  
-
4.2.2  
Group  
Multiple destination addresses can be grouped, and registered as a Group. This is convenient for sending  
data to multiple destinations simultaneously.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
4-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4.3  
Optional settings  
4
4.3  
Optional settings  
The following settings can be configured as necessary.  
Fax/Scan programs  
The destination and scan settings can be registered together as a single program. This is convenient for fre-  
quently scanning documents and sending data under the same conditions. Use the touch panel of the ma-  
chine to configure the settings.  
d
Reference  
For details, refer to page 9-20.  
Custom display settings  
Configure the settings of the screen that appears when Fax/Scan in the control panel is pressed.  
d
Reference  
For details, refer to page 9-24.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
4-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4.4  
Using the Web service  
4
4.4  
Using the Web service  
Allows you to command scan operations from the computer (Windows Vista) on the network, and scan data  
for a purpose and send it to the computer. The following explains the presetting required for the computer.  
4.4.1  
4.4.2  
Settings required to use the Web service  
The following settings are required to use the Web service.  
-
-
Installing the driver program of this machine to a computer  
Configuring settings to use the Web service on this machine  
Reference  
The Web service settings on this machine are configured in Administrator Settings. For details, refer to  
the [User's Guide Network Administrator].  
-
Installing the driver program of this machine to a computer  
Check before installation  
Before installing the driver program, make sure [Network discovery] is turned on in [Control Panel] - [Network  
and Sharing Center].  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
4-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
4.4  
Using the Web service  
4
Installation procedure  
1
From the [Start] button, select [Network].  
Devices connected to the network appear.  
2
3
Right-click the scanner icon representing this machine, and select [Install].  
% Depending on the settings on the computer, the UAC (User Account Control) dialog box may ap-  
pear. Check the details, and continue.  
% If both of the scan and printer functions of the Web service are enabled on the machine, the machine  
is represented by the printer icon.  
% The driver software is automatically installed. When the confirmation dialog box appear, click  
[Close].  
Select [Web Service] on the control panel of this machine, to ensure that the connection to the compu-  
ter is established.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
4-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.1  
Operation flow  
5
5
Sending  
This section describes the procedure for sending fax and scanned data, and available functions.  
5.1  
Operation flow  
5.1.1  
Scan/Network Fax  
The following describes the operation flow for sending scanned data and for using Network Fax function.  
Press Fax/Scan.  
Specify the destination  
Address Book (p. 5-20)  
Direct Input (p. 5-25)  
Address Search (p. 5-33)  
Configure Scan Settings (p. 5-36), Original Set-  
tings (p. 5-55) and Communication Settings  
Load the original  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
5-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
5.1  
Operation flow  
5
To check the advanced preview, press Proof  
Press Start.  
Reference  
-
If the optional Security Kit SC-507 is installed, and [Security Details] [Password Copy] is set to [Yes]  
in Administrator Settings, when scanning an original with a password embedded, a message prompting  
you to enter a password appears. Press [Password], enter the password, and then press [OK]. On the  
screen that reappears, press [Begin Authentication] to start sending.  
-
If the optional Security Kit SC-507 is installed, and [Security Details] [Copy Guard] is set to [Yes] in  
Administrator Settings, you cannot send an original with copy guard patterns embedded.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
5-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.1  
Operation flow  
5
5.1.2  
G3 fax  
The following describes the operation flow for using G3 fax function.  
Press Fax/Scan.  
Specify the destination  
Address Book (p. 5-20)  
Direct Input (p. 5-25)  
Configure Scan Settings (p. 5-36), Original Set-  
tings (p. 5-55) and Communication Settings  
Load the original  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
5-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5.1  
Operation flow  
5
To check the advanced preview, press Proof  
Press Start .  
Reference  
-
If the optional Security Kit SC-507 is installed, and [Security Details] [Password Copy] is set to [Yes]  
in Administrator Settings, when scanning an original with a password embedded, a message prompting  
you to enter a password appears. Press [Password], enter the password, and then press [OK]. On the  
screen that reappears, press [Begin Authentication] to start sending.  
-
If the optional Security Kit SC-507 is installed, and [Security Details] [Copy Guard] is set to [Yes] in  
Administrator Settings, you cannot send an original with copy guard patterns embedded.  
5.1.3  
Recalling a program  
The following describes the procedure to use the scan/fax program.  
Press Fax/Scan.  
Press Mode Memory.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
5-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5.1  
Operation flow  
5
Select a program, and press [OK].  
Configure Scan Settings (p. 5-36), Original Set-  
tings (p. 5-55) and Communication Settings  
Load the original  
To check the advanced preview, press Proof  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
5-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.1  
Operation flow  
5
Press Start.  
Reference  
-
If the optional Security Kit SC-507 is installed, and [Security Details] [Password Copy] is set to [Yes]  
in Administrator Settings, when scanning an original with a password embedded, a message prompting  
you to enter a password appears. Press [Password], enter the password, and then press [OK]. On the  
screen that reappears, press [Begin Authentication] to start sending.  
-
If the optional Security Kit SC-507 is installed, and [Security Details] [Copy Guard] is set to [Yes] in  
Administrator Settings, you cannot send an original with copy guard patterns embedded.  
d
Reference  
For the description and procedure on registering a program, refer to page 9-20.  
5.1.4  
Broadcasting  
The following describes the procedure for sending a fax to multiple destinations simultaneously.  
Press Fax/Scan.  
Specify multiple destinations.  
Address Book (p. 5-20)  
Direct Input (p. 5-25)  
Address Search (p. 5-33)  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
5-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5.1  
Operation flow  
5
Configure Scan Settings (p. 5-36), Original Set-  
tings (p. 5-55) and Communication Settings  
Load the original  
To check the advanced preview, press Proof  
Press Start.  
Reference  
-
If the optional Security Kit SC-507 is installed, and [Security Details] [Password Copy] is set to [Yes]  
in Administrator Settings, when scanning an original with a password embedded, a message prompting  
you to enter a password appears. Press [Password], enter the password, and then press [OK]. On the  
screen that reappears, press [Begin Authentication] to start sending.  
-
If the optional Security Kit SC-507 is installed, and [Security Details] [Copy Guard] is set to [Yes] in  
Administrator Settings, you cannot send an original with copy guard patterns embedded.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
5-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.2  
Using the advanced preview  
5
5.2  
Using the advanced preview  
Loading the original in the fax or scan mode and entering the address allows you to preview the finishing im-  
age on the control panel by pressing Proof Copy. In the Preview screen, the orientation of the scanned orig-  
inal can be checked or the settings can be changed.  
Reference  
-
If Encryption is selected, you cannot display the preview image.  
5.2.1  
Preview screen  
Preview - View Pages  
Displays the scanned image.  
Item  
Description  
[Previous Page]/[Next Page]  
If the saved document contains multiple pages,  
use these buttons to switch the display to another  
page.  
[Zoom]  
Press either of [ ]/[ ] to change the display size  
to check the details of the document. Each time  
pressing [ ], the display size changes to 2 times,  
4 times and 8 times of the full size display in this or-  
der. In the enlarged display mode, use the scroll  
bars located in the right and the bottom of the im-  
age to view to the desired portion of the document.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
5-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
5.2  
Using the advanced preview  
5
Item  
Description  
[Rotate Image]  
When [Scan] is selected in [Preview]  
: Rotates the currently displayed page 90 de-  
grees anti-clockwise to show the image.  
:Rotates the currently displayed page 90 de-  
grees clockwise to show the image.  
[Rotate Pages]: Select if the saved document con-  
tains multiple pages.  
You can select multiple images in the page to  
be rotated.  
[Odd Page]: Select images in the odd num-  
bered pages.  
[Even Page]: Select images in the even num-  
bered pages.  
[Select All]: Select images in all pages.  
[Rotation Angle]: Select [Left 90°] , [Right 90°] ,  
or [180°] as the rotation angle.  
When the destination is a fax, an image is sent at  
180 degrees if [Left 90°] is selected in [Rotation An-  
gle] and at 0 degrees if [Right 90°] is selected.  
If TIFF or JPEG is selected as the file format to read  
a long original, the rotation mode may not be spec-  
ified.  
When [Fax] is selected in [Preview]  
: Rotates the currently displayed page by 180  
degrees to show the image.  
[Rotate Pages]: Select if the saved document con-  
tains multiple pages.  
You can select multiple images in the page to  
be rotated.  
[Odd Page]: Select images in the odd num-  
bered pages.  
[Even Page]: Select images in the even num-  
bered pages.  
[Select All]: Select images in all pages.  
[Rotation Angle]: Click [180°] to rotate a page.  
[Delete Page]  
This item appears if the saved document contains  
multiple pages.  
You can select multiple images in the page to be  
deleted.  
[Odd Page]: Select images in the odd num-  
bered pages.  
[Even Page]: Select images in the even num-  
bered pages.  
All pages cannot be deleted.  
[View Finishing]  
[Change Setting]  
Displays icons in a preview image when TX Stamp  
is selected. If [View Finishing] is canceled, only the  
image appears while icons and text are hidden.  
Change some of the settings you have configured  
prior to scanning the original. For details, refer to  
Reference  
-
Select a page directly to rotate the image of the selected page by 180 degrees.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
5-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
5.2  
Using the advanced preview  
5
Preview - View Pages - Change Setting  
Change the following settings you have configured prior to scanning the original.  
The changes apply to the subsequent pages of the originals to be scanned.  
Item  
Description  
[Basic] - [Document]  
Select whether the original is 1-sided or 2-sided. If  
the "Cover+2-Sided" setting is enabled, [Cover +  
2-Sided] appears as well.  
[Basic] - [Binding Position]  
Allows you to select this item if the destination type  
is any of E-mail, User Box, FTP, PC (SMB) or Web-  
DAV, and if the Book Copy function is not selected.  
[Basic] - [Original Size]  
Select if the "Mixed Original" setting is enabled.  
Select to erase document frames.  
[Application] - [Frame Erase]  
Preview - View Status  
Determine whether to scan subsequent pages or not.  
Item  
Description  
[Finish]  
To scan subsequent pages of the originals current-  
ly shown, make sure [Finish] is not selected.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
5-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
5.2  
Using the advanced preview  
5
5.2.2  
Sending with the advanced preview  
The following describes the procedure after the original is loaded. For details on the general flow for sending  
fax and scanned data, refer to page 5-2.  
Sending with Advanced Preview  
1
2
3
4
Load the original.  
Specify the destination.  
Press the Proof Copy key.  
Select the original direction.  
% On the original glass  
% On the ADF  
% If [Advanced Preview Setting] [Original Direction Confirmation Screen] is set to [OFF] in Adminis-  
trator Settings, the screen for specifying the direction in which the original is loaded does not ap-  
pear. For details on [Original Direction Confirmation Screen], refer to page 10-11.  
5
Press the Start key.  
The original is scanned, and the Preview screen appears.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
5-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
5.2  
Using the advanced preview  
Check the preview image, and rotate the image or change settings as needed.  
5
6
% To scan subsequent page, press the [View Status] tab, cancel [Finish], and load the original.  
7
Press the Start key.  
Transmission begins.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
5-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.3  
Fax/scan mode menu tree  
5
5.3  
Fax/scan mode menu tree  
The following describes the screen components and settings of the functions available in Fax/scan mode.  
[Address Book] tab  
The following settings can be configured with the [Address Book] tab. (page 5-20)  
First level  
[Scan Settings] (p. 5-36)  
[Original Settings] (p. 5-55)  
[Communication Settings] (p. 5-58)  
[Direct Input] tab  
The following settings can be configured with the [Direct Input] tab. (page 5-25)  
First level  
[User Box] (p. 5-26)  
[Internet Fax] (p. 5-26)  
[IP Address Fax] (p. 5-27)  
[PC (SMB)] (p. 5-28)  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
5-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
5.3  
Fax/scan mode menu tree  
5
First level  
[Scan Settings] (p. 5-36)  
[Original Settings] (p. 5-55)  
[Communication Settings] (p. 5-58)  
[Job History] tab  
The following settings can be configured with the [Job History] tab. (page 5-32)  
First level  
[Dest]  
[Scan Settings] (p. 5-36)  
[Original Settings] (p. 5-55)  
[Communication Settings] (p. 5-58)  
[Address Search] tab  
The following settings can be configured with the [Address Search] tab. (page 5-33)  
First level  
[Scan Settings] (p. 5-36)  
[Original Settings] (p. 5-55)  
[Communication Settings] (p. 5-58)  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
5-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
5.3  
Fax/scan mode menu tree  
5
[Off-Hook]  
[Scan Settings]  
The following settings can be configured with the [Scan Settings] tab. (page 5-36)  
First level  
Second level  
Third level  
Fourth level  
Fifth level  
[Original Type] (p. 5-36)  
[Simplex/Duplex] (p. 5-37)  
[Resolution] (p. 5-37)  
[File Type]  
[File Type] (p. 5-38)  
[Encryption] (p. 5-40)  
[Stamp Composition] (p. 5-42)  
[Outline PDF] (p. 5-42)  
[Density] (p. 5-43)  
[Image Adjust-  
ment]  
[Sharpness] (p. 5-46)  
[Application]  
[Frame Erase] (p. 5-46)  
[Annotation] (p. 5-49)  
[Stamp/Composi-  
tion]  
[Date/Time]  
[Date Format]  
[Time Format]  
[Pages]  
[Print Position]  
[Text Details]  
[Text Color]  
[Text Size]  
[Text Type]  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
5-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
5.3  
Fax/scan mode menu tree  
First level  
5
Second level  
Third level  
Fourth level  
Fifth level  
[Page Number]  
[Starting Page Number]  
[Starting Chapter Number]  
[Page Number Type]  
[Print Position]  
[Text Details]  
[Text Color]  
[Text Size]  
[Text Type]  
[Stamp Type/Preset Stamps]  
[Pages]  
[Text Size]  
[Text Color]  
[Print Position]  
[Header/Footer]  
[Recall Header/Footer]  
[Check/Change Temporarily]  
[Send & Print]  
[Copies:]  
[Simplex/Duplex]  
[Staple]  
[TX Stamp] (p. 5-53)  
[Separate Scan] (p. 5-54)  
[Original Settings]  
The following settings can be configured with the [Original Settings] tab. (page 5-55)  
First level  
Second level  
Third level  
Fourth level  
[Special Original]  
[Mixed Original] (p. 5-55)  
[Z-Folded Original] (p. 5-55)  
[Long Original] (p. 5-55)  
[Direction Set-  
tings]  
[Original Direction] (p. 5-55)  
[Total # of Pages (Quick Memory TX)] (p. 5-56)  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
5-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5.3  
Fax/scan mode menu tree  
5
[Communication Settings]  
The following settings can be configured with the [Communication Settings] tab. (page 5-58)  
First level  
Second level  
Third level  
Fourth level  
[Line Settings]  
[Check Dest. & Send] (p. 5-59)  
[Select Line] (p. 5-59)  
[Document Name] (p. 5-59)  
[E-mail Settings]  
[URL Notification Setting] (p. 5-61)  
[Communication  
Method Settings]  
[Quick Memory TX] (p. 5-62)  
[Polling RX]  
[Normal] (p. 5-63)  
[Password TX] (p. 5-64)  
[Polling TX]  
[Normal] (p. 5-65)  
[SUB Address]  
[Password]  
[F-Code TX]  
[Digital Signature] (p. 5-66)  
[Fax Header Settings] (p. 5-67)  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
5-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5.4  
Fax/Scan initial screen  
5
5.4  
Fax/Scan initial screen  
5.4.1  
Description of screen components  
Press Fax/Scan to display the following screen.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
No.  
1
Item  
Description  
Refer-  
ence  
[Address Book]  
[Direct Input]  
Press this button to select the recipient from the pre-  
registered destinations.  
2
Press this button to directly enter unregistered desti-  
nations.  
3
4
[Job History]  
Select the desired one from the destination history.  
[Address Search]  
Press this button to search a destination registered on  
the LDAP server.  
5
6
7
8
[Off-Hook]  
Press this button to put the machine into the off hook  
state ready for dialing.  
[Scan Settings]  
Allows you to configure detailed settings for scanning  
the document.  
[Original Settings]  
[Communication Settings]  
Allows you to configure the detailed settings for the  
original type and original direction.  
Press to configure communication settings.  
Reference  
-
-
-
-
If manual destination input is restricted in [Security Settings] in Administrator Settings, the [Direct Input]  
tab is not displayed.  
If Confirm Address (TX) is set to ON, [Off-Hook] is not displayed. For details on the Confirm Address  
function, refer to page 10-21.  
For details on the LDAP server setting, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator] - "LDAP set-  
ting".  
The display position for each tab varies depending on the User Settings. For details, refer to page 9-24.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
5-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
5.5  
Address Book  
5
5.5  
Address Book  
Allows you to select a registered address.  
Me (Scan to Me)  
If User Authentication is selected, the [Me] address is displayed in [Address Book]. Pressing the displayed  
[Me] address allows you to easily send scan data to your E-mail address (E-mail address of user registration  
information).  
1
No.  
Item  
Description  
1
[Me]  
Select your own E-mail address (E-mail address in user registration  
information).  
Reference  
-
[Me] appears in the [Address Book] tab if [Default Address Book] in the User Settings is set to [Index].  
d
Reference  
For details on setting this function, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator].  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
5-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
5.5  
Address Book  
5
Home (Scan to Home)  
If Active Directory is used for user authentication, press [Home] that appears on the touch panel to allow you  
to easily send scanned data to your own Home folder.  
To do so, set [Scan to Home Settings] to [Enable] in Administrator Settings.  
1
No.  
Item  
Description  
1
[Home]  
Select your own Home folder.  
d
Reference  
For details on setting this function, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator].  
5.5.1  
5.5.2  
Group  
The destinations registered as groups appear.  
Search  
Search for transmission destinations. The following methods are available to search for the registered desti-  
nations.  
Address Type  
This function enables you to search by the destination type configured when registered destination.  
d
Reference  
For details, refer to page 9-24.  
For details on address book registration, refer to page 9-7.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
5-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
5.5  
Address Book  
5
The [Address Type] is displayed when you press [Search] if [Default Address Book] is set to [Index] in [User  
Settings] - [Custom Display Settings] - [Scan/Fax Settings] in the Utility menu.  
1
No.  
Item  
Description  
1
[Address Type]  
Displays destinations for each registered type.  
Index  
Displays the destinations based on the index that was specified when the destination was registered.  
d
Reference  
For details, refer to page 9-24.  
For details on address book registration, refer to page 9-7.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
5-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5.5  
Address Book  
5
The [Index] is displayed when you press [Search] if [Default Address Book] is set to [Address Type] in [User  
Settings] - [Custom Display Settings] - [Scan/Fax Settings] in the Utility menu.  
1
No.  
Item  
Description  
1
[Index]  
Displays destinations for each registered index.  
Detail Search  
Enter the address name or a part of the address to search for the destination address. Select either [Name]  
or [Address], and enter an index.  
Search Option  
In the Detail Search screen, select a condition to display search options. Select the option you want to add  
to the search conditions, then press [OK].  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
5-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
5.5  
Address Book  
5
Reference  
-
To configure whether to display the search option screen and options displayed on that screen, use  
[Search Option Settings] in the setting menu. For details, refer to page 9-26.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
5-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.6  
Direct Input  
5
5.6  
Direct Input  
Directly enter to specify the destination not registered.  
5.6.1  
Fax  
Enter the fax number by using the keypad or the panel buttons.  
After you press [OK], the screen to enter the fax number appears again if "Confirm Address (TX)" is set to ON.  
Enter the fax number, and then press [Send].  
d
Reference  
For details on the Confirm Address function, refer to page 10-21.  
5.6.2  
E-mail  
Enter the E-mail address in the touch panel.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
5-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
5.6  
Direct Input  
5
5.6.3  
User Box  
Select the User Box type, and then select the User Box.  
d
Reference  
For details on using the saved data in User Boxes, refer to the [User's Guide Box Operations].  
5.6.4  
Internet Fax  
Enter the E-mail address in the touch panel.  
Next Destination  
Press this button to continuously specify another destination.  
Receiver RX Ability  
Select settings that are receivable in the Internet Fax destination. Multiple receivable settings can be select-  
ed.  
Item  
Description  
[Compression Type]  
Select from JPEG Color, JPEG (Grayscale), MMR, MR, or MH.  
The compression ratio is higher in JPEG, MMR, MR and MH in this order. The  
higher the compression ratio is, the shorter the transmission time. However,  
the recipient's machine may not have capability to receive such compression  
type. Select the compression type receivable on the receiver side.  
[Paper Size]  
[Resolution]  
Select from A3, B4 or A4.  
600e600 dpi (Ultra Fine), 400e400 dpi (Super Fine), 200e200 dpi (Fine), or  
200e100 dpi (Standard).  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
5-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
5.6  
Direct Input  
5
5.6.5  
IP Address Fax  
Enter the destination of IP Address Fax.  
[Address]  
Enter any of the IP address, host name or E-mail address of the destination.  
The entry methods are as follows:  
-
-
-
For IP address  
Directly specify the IP address of the destination.  
For host name on network  
Specify the host name of the destination.  
For E-mail address (1)  
Use the E-mail address format.  
Entry example:  
IPv4 address format: ipaddrfax@[192.168.0.101]  
IPv6 address format: ipaddrfax@[IPv6:2004:2740:1003:1:250:70ff:fe00:1567]  
To use the E-mail address format, enclose the IP address following the 'at' mark (@) in brackets [ ].  
To use the IPv6 address format, enter "IPv6:" just after the left bracket "[".  
-
For E-mail address format (2)  
Entry example: [email protected]  
"test.local" following the 'at' mark (@) indicates a domain name of the local machine, which is not a do-  
main name used in an E-mail address.  
To use the E-mail address format (2), specify the DNS server that enables you to resolve the domain  
name of the local machine.  
[Port Number]  
Use the keypad to enter the sending port number (using a value from 1 to 65535).  
[Destination Machine Type]  
Select [Color] when the destination machine supports color printing.  
[Next Destination]  
Press this button to continuously specify another destination.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
5-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
5.6  
Direct Input  
5
5.6.6  
PC (SMB)  
Enter the PC (SMB) address.  
[Host Name]  
Specify the host name (in uppercase letters) or IP address for the destination with the panel.  
[File Path]  
Enter the path to the destination folder in uppercase letters with the panel.  
[User Name]  
Enter the login user name in the touch panel.  
[Password]  
Enter the login user password in the touch panel.  
[Reference]  
You can check the folder configuration on the destination computer. You can directly specify the destination  
folder if necessary.  
[Next Destination]  
Press this button to continuously specify another destination.  
5.6.7  
FTP  
Enter the PC (FTP) address.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
5-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
5.6  
Direct Input  
5
[Host Name]  
Specify the host name or IP address of the destination in the touch panel.  
[File Path]  
Enter the path of the destination folder in the touch panel.  
[User Name]  
Enter the login user name in the touch panel. To enter the text "anonymous", press [Anonymous].  
[Password]  
Enter the login password.  
[Detailed Settings]  
Press this button to configure the more detailed settings.  
Item  
Description  
[Port Number]  
[PASV]  
Enter the port number.  
Specify whether to use the PASV mode.  
Specify whether to use a proxy server.  
[Proxy]  
[Next Destination]  
Press this button to continuously specify another destination.  
5.6.8  
WebDAV  
Enter the WebDAV address.  
[Host Name]  
Specify the host name or IP address of the destination in the touch panel.  
[File Path]  
Enter the path of the destination folder in the touch panel.  
[User Name]  
Enter the login user name in the touch panel.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
5-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                           
5.6  
Direct Input  
5
[Password]  
Enter the login user password in the touch panel.  
[Detailed Settings]  
Press this button to configure the more detailed settings.  
Item  
Description  
[Port Number]  
[Proxy]  
Enter the port number.  
Specify whether to use a proxy server.  
Specify whether to use SSL for sending.  
[SSL Settings]  
[Next Destination]  
Press this button to continuously specify another destination.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
5-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
5.6  
Direct Input  
5
5.6.9  
Web Service  
Send scanned data to a computer previously registered in the network.  
The computers on the network, in which this machine is designated as the Web service scanner, appear as  
the destinations. Select the destination.  
d
Reference  
For the settings you must configure in advance, refer to page 4-6.  
Data can be scanned and saved by sending command to this machine from the computer. For the detailed  
procedure, refer to page 13-3.  
[Details]  
Displays the destination name and URL.  
[Search]  
Enter a keyword that is included in the desired destination name with the panel, and search for destination.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
5-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
5.7  
Job History  
5
5.7  
Job History  
Job History displays the latest five fax destinations that this machine have sent faxes to. You can select des-  
tinations from this history.  
The previously sent destination history remains.  
Press one or multiple addresses from the history list.  
Reference  
-
If you use a Web service for sending, the address is not displayed in the history.  
[Name]  
When you use the address book for sending, [Name] is displayed in the job history. If you press [Name], [Dest]  
in the job history changes to [Name], and the registered name appears.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
5-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
5.8  
Address Search  
5
5.8  
Address Search  
5.8.1  
Search  
Enter a search keyword and press [Start Search] to search for matching address in the specified LDAP server.  
5.8.2  
Advanced Search  
Specify multiple search criteria to search for the desired address.  
[Name]  
Enter the name in the touch panel.  
[E-Mail Addr.]  
Enter the E-mail address in the touch panel.  
[Fax Number]  
Enter the fax number in the touch panel.  
[Last Name]  
Enter the last name in the touch panel.  
[First Name]  
Enter the first name in the touch panel.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
5-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
5.8  
Address Search  
5
[City]  
Enter the city name in the touch panel.  
[Company Name]  
Enter the company name in the touch panel.  
[Department]  
Enter the department in the touch panel.  
[OR]/[AND]/[STARTS WITH]/[ENDS WITH]  
Select the search condition from OR, AND, STARTS WITH, or ENDS WITH.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
5-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
5.9  
Off-Hook (G3)  
5
5.9  
Off-Hook (G3)  
Use this button to manually send a fax.  
Reference  
-
-
-
Memory transmission can not be used in combination with the off-hook function.  
If Confirm Address (TX) is set to ON, the off-hook function cannot be used.  
If the optional Security Kit SC-507 is installed, and [Security Details] [Copy Guard] or [Password  
Copy] is set to [Yes] in Administrator Settings, [Off-Hook] is not displayed.  
Manual transmission  
Load the original, and configure the scan setting as needed. Press [Off-Hook] to turn into the on-hook state,  
and the screen appears to select the recipient.  
Press [Send], select the recipient, and press [Start].  
Reference  
-
You can specify the destinations by directly entering them or selecting them from the address book,  
Job History, or programs.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
5-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
5.10  
Scan Settings  
5
5.10  
Scan Settings  
Press [Scan Settings] to configure detailed scan settings.  
5.10.1 Original Type  
Select the original type based on the original contents. The original type you can select are as follows.  
[Text]  
Original that consists of only text.  
[Text/Photo]  
Select for originals consisting of both text and photos (halftones).  
If you select [Text/Photo] or [Photo], you can also specify the photo type.  
Item  
Description  
[Photo Paper]  
[Printed Photo]  
Select for photos printed on photo paper.  
Select for printed photos such as that in books or magazines.  
[Photo]  
Original that consists of only photos (halftone).  
[Dot Matrix Original]  
Original with faint-printing in whole.  
[Copied Paper]  
Original with even density that was printed using a copier or printer.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
5-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
5.10  
Scan Settings  
5
5.10.2 Simplex/Duplex  
Select either to scan a single-sided original or to scan a double-sided original.  
[1-Sided]  
Scans one side of the original.  
[2-Sided]  
Scans both sides of the original.  
[Cover + 2-Sided]  
Scans the first page of the original as a cover in the single-sided mode, and also scans the remaining pages  
in the double-sided mode.  
5.10.3 Resolution  
Select the resolution for scanning.  
Reference  
-
If [300 e300dpi] or [200 e100dpi] is selected when sending a G3 fax or Internet fax, the resolution is  
automatically changed to 200 e200 dpi.  
-
If destination is selected with IP Address Fax when the compact PDF or compact XPS is selected, or if  
destination selected with IP Address Fax is included in broadcast, the scan resolution of 400 e400 dpi  
or 600 e600 dpi is changed to 300 e300 dpi.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
5-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
5.10  
Scan Settings  
5
5.10.4 File Type  
Select the file type for saving the scan data.  
File Type  
The available file types are as follows.  
Item  
Description  
[PDF]  
Saves data in PDF format.  
[Compact PDF]  
[TIFF]  
Select to save compressed data rather than with PDF format.  
Saves data in TIFF format.  
[JPEG]  
Saves data in JPEG format.  
[XPS]  
Saves data in XPS format.  
[Compact XPS]  
Select to save compressed data rather than with XPS format.  
You cannot specify some file formats depending on the [Color] settings. The following shows the combina-  
tions of the [File Type] and [Color] settings.  
[Auto Zoom]  
[Full Color]  
[Gray Scale]  
[Black]  
[PDF]  
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
[Compact PDF]  
[TIFF]  
o
[JPEG]  
[XPS]  
o
[Compact XPS]  
Reference  
-
Even if you have selected the file type when saving a document in a User Box, you must specify the file  
type when downloading the data of the document.  
-
When saving a TIFF file in color, the compression format can be specified. For details, refer to  
-
-
If you select [JPEG], [1 Every X Page(s)] is automatically selected in Page Separation in Scan Setting.  
If destination is selected with IP Address Fax when the compact PDF or compact XPS is selected, or if  
destination selected with IP Address Fax is included in broadcast, the scan resolution of 400 e400 dpi  
or 600 e600 dpi is changed to 300 e300 dpi.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
5-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
5.10  
Scan Settings  
5
Scan Setting  
Data arrangement can be specified when originals containing multiple pages are scanned and sent.  
Item  
Description  
[Multi Page]  
Creates all the scanned originals as one file. This setting cannot be selected  
if [JPEG] is selected for the file type.  
[Page Separation]  
Select to divide the scanned data at a specified page.  
Using the keypad, enter the number of pages to be saved in a file.  
[E-mail Attachment  
Method]  
Specify the method for attaching a file to an E-mail when Page Separation is  
selected.  
[All Files Sent as one (1) E-mail]: Attaches all files to one E-mail.  
The maximum 300 files can be attached to one E-mail. If the number of  
attachment files exceeds 300, files are split and sent as multiple E-mail  
messages.  
(Example) If the number of split files is 350  
1st E-mail: 300 files attached  
2nd E-mail: 50 files attached  
If [All Files Sent as one (1) E-mail] is selected, the size of one E-mail is lim-  
ited to 200 MB or less. If the size of an E-mail exceeds the capacity, files  
are split and sent as multiple E-mail messages.  
(Example) If the capacity is 200 MB and the size of one E-mail is 250 MB  
1st E-mail: 197 MB  
2nd E-mail: 53 MB  
If [E-Mail TX (SMTP)] is set to [Binary Division] in Administrator Settings,  
the setting for Binary Division is given priority.  
If the server capacity is specified in [E-Mail TX (SMTP)] in Administrator  
Settings, files may be split at the specified size and sent as multiple E-  
mail messages.  
(Example) If the size of one E-mail is 1.5 MB (5 files attached), and the  
server capacity is 1 MB  
1st E-mail: 0.9 MB (3 files attached)  
2nd E-mail: 0.7 MB (2 files attached)  
[One (1) File per E-Mail]: Attaches one file to one E-mail.  
If [One (1) File per E-Mail] is selected, the size of one E-mail is limited to  
less than 400 MB. You cannot send E-mail with the size of 400 MB or  
more.  
If [E-Mail TX (SMTP)] is set to [Binary Division] in Administrator Settings,  
the setting for Binary Division is given priority.  
Reference  
-
-
When saving a document in a User Box, it is saved with [Multi Page] while Page Separation is specified.  
Page Separation is enabled when sending by E-mail, SMB, or FTP.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
5-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
5.10  
Scan Settings  
5
Encryption  
If the [PDF] or [Compact PDF] is selected for the file format, the encryption level can be specified.  
Item  
Description  
[Password]  
Enter the password necessary to open encrypted  
data (up to 32 characters). For confirmation, enter  
the password twice.  
[Document Permissions]  
Enter the password necessary to change docu-  
ment permissions (up to 32 characters). For con-  
firmation, enter the password twice.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
5-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
5.10  
Scan Settings  
Item  
5
Description  
[Detail Settings]  
Allows you to configure the detailed permission settings when the docu-  
ment permission is specified in [Encryption].  
[Printing Allowed]  
Select whether to allow or restrict printing data.  
[Low Resolution] appears when the Encryption  
Level is set to [High level].  
If [Low level] is selected  
If [High level] is selected  
[Changes Allowed]  
Press [Forward  
] in the Detail Settings screen  
to select the change allowable level in detail. In  
[Changes Allowed], select the permission level for  
making changes to the document such as digital  
signature, inputs and annotations.  
If [Low level] is selected  
If [High level] is selected  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
5-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
5.10  
Scan Settings  
5
Stamp Composition  
Press this button to select how to compose the contents to be added in Stamp/Composition.  
-
-
What can be combined as text are date/time, page number and header/footer.  
Stamps are combined as images.  
Item  
Description  
[Image]  
[Text]  
Select this setting to insert the text as an image.  
Select this setting to insert the text as text.  
Outline PDF  
Configure this item when [Compact PDF] is selected for the file type. This function performs outline process-  
ing for characters, ensuring a smooth display image. It is also available when editing data using an application  
such as Adobe Illustrator.  
d
Reference  
This function enables you to specify the accuracy of outline processing when creating an outline PDF. For  
details, refer to page 9-26.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
5-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
5.10  
Scan Settings  
5
5.10.5 Density  
Adjust the density for the scanned document.  
-
-
To adjust the density, press [Light] or [Dark].  
Press [Standard] to return to default value.  
5.10.6 Color (E-mail/BOX/SMB/FTP/WebDAV/IP/I-FAX)  
Specify whether to scan originals in color or black-and-white.  
Some color settings may not be available, depending on the selected [File Type] setting. The following shows  
the combinations of the [File Type] and [Color] settings.  
[Auto Color]  
[Full Color]  
[Gray Scale]  
[Black]  
[PDF]  
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
[Compact PDF]  
[TIFF]  
o
[JPEG]  
[XPS]  
o
[Compact XPS]  
Reference  
-
When saving a TIFF file in color, the compression format can be specified. For details, refer to  
-
If you select [JPEG], [1 Every X Page(s)] is automatically selected in Page Separation in Scan Setting.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
5-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
5.10  
Scan Settings  
5
[Auto Zoom]  
Automatically detects the color of the original and scans it to fit the original setting.  
[Full Color]  
Scans the original in full color.  
[Gray Scale]  
Select for originals with many halftones, such as in black-and-white photos.  
[Black]  
Select for originals with distinct black and white areas, such as in line drawings.  
5.10.7 Scan Size  
Select to determine the size of paper to be scanned.  
Standard  
Press [Auto] to automatically detect the size of the first page in the original when scanning. Select the size to  
scan the original with a predetermined paper size such as 8-1/2 e11 (A4) or 7-1/4 e10-1/2 (B5).  
[Custom Size]  
Enter the dimensions of a custom size other than the standard sizes.  
-
-
X-direction: Enter a value from 2 to 17 inches (30.0 to 432.0 mm).  
Y-direction: Enter a value from 2 to 11 - 11/16 inches (30.0 to 297.0 mm).  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
5-44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
5.10  
Scan Settings  
5
[Photo Size]  
Select the size only for photographs.  
5.10.8 Image Adjustment - Background Removal  
This function removes background or adjusts background density of originals to be scanned.  
-
Select either [Bleed Removal] or [Paper Discoloration Adj], and adjust the density with [Background Re-  
moval Level].  
-
To adjust the density automatically, press [Auto].  
Item  
Description  
[Bleed Removal]  
When scanning a double-sided original, the print on the back side may be re-  
produced in the copy. Such background prints can be adjusted.  
[Paper Discoloration Adj]  
When scanning originals printed on colored paper, the background may be-  
come black. In that case, the density of the background can be adjusted.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
5-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
5.10  
Scan Settings  
5
5.10.9 Image Adjustment - Sharpness  
When scanning, contours, for example, the edges of text, can be emphasized.  
5.10.10 Application - Frame Erase  
Select to erase frames of the original.  
-
-
-
To erase all frames with the same width, press [Frame] and specify a numeric value between 1/16 and  
2 inches (0.1 and 50.0 mm).  
To individually specify the top, left, right, and bottom widths, press the desired button and specify a  
numeric value for that side.  
To not to erase frames, press [None].  
Reference  
If the width to be erased around the original is specified with [Frame Erase] of the Book Copy function,  
the same settings also applies to [Frame Erase].  
-
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
5-46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
5.10  
Scan Settings  
5
5.10.11 Application - Book Copy  
Configure settings to scan a two-page spread. In addition, the binding position and erase settings can be  
specified.  
Reference  
-
-
Specify the size of the two-page spread as the scan size.  
This function cannot be set with Quick Memory TX.  
[Book Spread]  
Scans a two-page spread as a single page.  
[Separation]  
Scans a two-page spread as two pages (left and right).  
[Front Cover]  
Scans the first page as a front cover.  
[Front + Back Covers]  
Scans the first page as a front cover, the second page as a back cover, and the third and subsequent pages  
as a body.  
[Book Erase-Frame Erase]  
Select to erase a frame in scanning spread pages.  
-
-
-
To erase all frames with the same width, press [Frame] and specify a numeric value between 1/16 and  
2 inches (0.1 and 50.0 mm).  
To individually specify the top, left, right, and bottom widths, press the desired button and specify a  
numeric value for that side.  
To not to erase frames, press [None].  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
5-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
5.10  
Scan Settings  
5
Reference  
-
If the width to be erased around the original is specified with [Frame Erase] of the Book Copy function,  
the same settings also applies to [Frame Erase].  
[Book Erase] - [Center Erase]  
Select to erase the shaded part around the binding position in the center of the original.  
-
Use the keypad or press [-] or [+] to enter a numeric value between 1/16 and 1-3/16 inches (0.1 and  
30.0 mm).  
[Binding Position]  
If Separation, Front Cover or Front and Back Cover was selected, press [Binding Position] to select the bind-  
ing position.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
5-48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
5.10  
Scan Settings  
5
5.10.12 Application - Annotation  
Scanned and saved document data can be printed or transmitted with an image of the date/time or an an-  
notation number.  
Selecting the Annotation User Box  
To use the Annotation User Box function, scanned data must be saved in the Annotation User Box in ad-  
vance. Annotation numbers are specified for each User Box. Select the User Box to save the data.  
Reference  
-
To use the Annotation User Box, it must be registered in advance. For details, refer to the [User's Guide  
Box Operations].  
5.10.13 Application - Stamp/Composition  
Date/Time  
Prints the date and time data that has been printed on a page.  
Item  
Description  
[Date Format]  
[Time Format]  
Select the format to display the date.  
Specify whether to add the time, and select the  
format to display the time.  
[Pages]  
Select whether to print the date and time on all  
pages or the first page only.  
[Print Position]  
[Print Position]  
[Fine-Tune]  
Select the print position.  
To fine-adjust the print position, press [Adjust Po-  
sition]. Specify the shift length of the print position  
to the left, right, top or bottom using a value be-  
tween 1/16 and 1-15/16 inches (0.1 and 50.0 mm)  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
5-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
5.10  
Scan Settings  
Item  
5
Description  
[Text Details]  
[Text Color]  
[Text Size]  
[Text Type]  
Select the printing color from black, red, blue,  
green, yellow, cyan, or magenta.  
Select the size (8 pt/10 pt/12 pt/14 pt) in which  
text is printed.  
Select the font type from Times Roman or Helvet-  
ica.  
Page Number  
Add page numbers to all pages of the document.  
Item  
Description  
[Starting Page Number]  
[Starting Chapter Number]  
[Page Number Type]  
Specify the starting page number.  
Specify the starting chapter number.  
Select the format to display a page number.  
Select the print position.  
[Print Position]  
[Print Position]  
[Fine-Tune]  
To fine-adjust the print position, press [Adjust Po-  
sition]. Specify the shift length of the print position  
to the left, right, top or bottom using a value be-  
tween 1/16 and 1-15/16 inches (0.1 and 50.0 mm)  
[Text Details]  
[Text Color]  
[Text Size]  
[Text Type]  
Select the printing color from black, red, blue,  
green, yellow, cyan, or magenta.  
Select the size (8 pt/10 pt/12 pt/14 pt) in which  
text is printed.  
Select the font type from Times Roman or Helvet-  
ica.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
5-50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
5.10  
Scan Settings  
5
Stamp  
Prints a predetermined character string such as [URGENT] on a page.  
Item  
Description  
[Stamp Type/Preset Stamps]  
Select the stamp type such as URGENT, PLEASE  
REPLY or DO NOT COPY.  
[Pages]  
Select whether to print the date and time on all  
pages or the first page only.  
[Text Color]  
[Text Size]  
[Print Position]  
Select the printing color from black, red, blue,  
green, yellow, cyan, or magenta.  
Select the printing text size from Minimal or Std.  
(Standard).  
[Print Position]  
[Fine-Tune]  
Select the print position.  
To fine-adjust the print position, press [Adjust Po-  
sition]. Specify the shift length of the print position  
to the left, right, top or bottom using a value be-  
tween 1/16 and 1-15/16 inches (0.1 and 50.0 mm)  
Header/Footer  
This function inserts headers or footers on all pages. Before you insert the header or footer, you must register  
their contents in Administrator Settings. Press [Check/Change Temporarily] to change the registered settings  
for printing.  
d
Reference  
For details on registering a header/footer, refer to page 10-10.  
Item  
Description  
[Recall Header/Footer]  
Select the target header or footer in the registered  
contents.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
5-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
5.10  
Scan Settings  
Item  
5
Description  
[Check/Change Temporarily]  
Select to display the contents that you can  
Check/Change Temporarily.  
[Header Settings, Footer Settings] Specify whether to print the header and footer.  
Pressing [Print] allows you to specify whether to  
print text, the date/time or other information (dis-  
tribution control number, job number or serial  
number).  
[Text]  
Specify a header or footer string via the control  
panel.  
[Date/Time]  
[Other]  
Specify the date/time for the header/footer.  
Specify the distribution control number, job  
number, or serial number of the header or footer.  
The serial number is that attached to the ma-  
chine. For details on settings, contact your  
service representative.  
[Pages]  
Select whether to print the date and time on all  
pages or the first page only.  
[Text Details]  
[Text Color]  
[Text Size]  
[Text Type]  
Select the printing color from black, red, blue,  
green, yellow, cyan, or magenta.  
Select the size (8 pt/10 pt/12 pt/14 pt) in which  
text is printed.  
Select the font type from Times Roman or Helvet-  
ica.  
5.10.14 Application - Send & Print  
Specify whether to print documents while being sent. Also, configure the print settings.  
Reference  
To use the staple function, the optional Finisher FS-527 or Finisher FS-529 is required.  
-
[Copies:]  
Use the keypad to enter the number of copies. A number between 1 and 9999 can be specified.  
[Simplex/Duplex]  
Select 1-Sided or 2-Sided.  
[Staple]  
Select whether to staple the printed sheets.  
Item  
Description  
[Position Setting]  
If you select the type of stapling, you can specify the position.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
5-52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                               
5.10  
Scan Settings  
5
5.10.15 Application - TX Stamp (G3/IP/I-FAX)  
TX Stamp  
When sending a fax using the ADF, apply this function to stamp the TX Stamp on the scanned originals to  
make sure that each page of the original has been scanned. TX Stamp is stamped only on the front-sided  
page for double-sided originals.  
Front side of original  
Original feed direction  
Stamp position  
-
When it is stamped, a 3/16 inches (4 mm) diameter pink stamp appears in the location as shown in the  
diagram.  
-
-
-
-
To use TX Stamp, the optional Stamp Unit SP-501 is required.  
The ink used for stamping is consumables. If the ink becomes faint, contact your service representative.  
If mixed originals are loaded, the stamp may not be stamped on the location as shown in the diagram.  
To check that the original has been successfully transmitted, refer to the transmission report or the  
transmission result that appears on the setting confirmation screen.  
-
If the quick memory transmission has been selected, selecting TX Stamp cancels the quick memory  
transmission.  
Stamping TX Stamp  
Select [TX Stamp] in the Application screen.  
5.10.16 Document Name (E-mail/BOX/SMB/FTP/WebDAV/I-FAX)  
Enter the document name in the control panel.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
5-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
5.10  
Scan Settings  
5
5.10.17 Separate Scan  
The scan operation can be divided into several sessions by types of originals, for example, when all pages of  
originals cannot be loaded into the ADF, when the originals are placed on the original glass, or when single-  
sided originals and double-sided originals are mixed. To select this setting, press [Separate Scan] to highlight  
it.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
5-54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
5.11  
Original Settings  
5
5.11  
Original Settings  
Specify the type of original that is loaded, for example, if it contains mixed page sizes or Z-folded originals.  
Reference  
The original setting and orientation functions can be used together.  
-
5.11.1 Special Original - Mixed Original  
Select this setting when loading originals with different sizes together into the ADF. The scanning speed will  
be lowered because the size of each page is detected before it is scanned.  
5.11.2 Special Original - Z-Folded Original  
Select this setting to detect the size of a z-folded original by the length fed through the ADF.  
5.11.3 Special Original - Long Original  
Available when loading an original of which the Duplex Paper Passage size is longer than the standard size  
(11 e17 or A3).  
5.11.4 Direction Settings - Original Direction  
Select the orientation of the original. After the document is scanned, the data is processed so that it is cor-  
rectly oriented.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
5-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
5.11  
Original Settings  
5
5.11.5 Direction Settings - Binding Position  
Select the binding position of the original when it has punched holes or is stapled. This adjusts the scan of  
double-sided originals so that the binding position is not reversed.  
Item  
Description  
[Auto]  
Sets the binding position to the long side if the size is 11-11/16 inches (297  
mm) or smaller, or the short side otherwise.  
[Top]  
[Left]  
Original with the page margin at the top  
Original with the page margin at the left  
5.11.6 Total # of Pages (Quick Memory TX) (G3)  
If the quick memory transmission is performed, the total number of pages are automatically printed in [No. of  
Pages] of the transmission source information in the format of "P. Page Number/Total pages". Select Quick  
Memory TX, and then press [Total # of Pages (Quick Memory TX)], and enter the number of original pages  
using the keypad.  
This function cannot be used together with the following functions.  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Memory TX  
Cover + 2-Sided (Scan Settings - Simplex/Duplex)  
Frame Erase  
Book Copy  
Scan Size  
Mixed Original  
Polling TX  
Polling RX  
Bulletin board  
Timer TX  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
5-56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
5.11  
Original Settings  
5
Reference  
-
If the specified number of pages does not match to that actually scanned, the specified number of pag-  
es is printed.  
-
This function is not available for memory transmission, since the total number of pages are automati-  
cally added.  
5.11.7 Despeckle  
Select to reduce the effect that dust on the slit glass has on images when the original is loaded into the ADF.  
Reference  
-
-
Specifying Despeckle will drop the scanning speed.  
If the slit glass is too dirty, clean it. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations].  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
5-57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
5.12  
Communication Settings  
5
5.12  
Communication Settings  
5.12.1 Line Settings (G3)  
With this function, configure line settings for Fax TX.  
Overseas TX  
Faxes are sent to locations with poor communication conditions at a lower baud rate.  
This function cannot be used together with the following functions.  
-
-
-
Polling TX  
Polling RX  
Bulletin board  
ECM OFF  
The Error Correction Mode (ECM) is turned off when sending data.  
ECM is an error correction mode defined by ITU-T (International Telecommunication Union - Telecommuni-  
cation Standardization Sector). Fax machines equipped with the ECM feature communicate with each other,  
confirming that the data sent is free of errors. Thus, communication can be made free from disturbances due  
to line noises, etc. If noises frequently occur, it may take a slightly long time to complete a communication  
compared with ECM OFF. After sending has been ended, this machine automatically returns to ECM ON.  
This function cannot be used together with the following functions.  
-
-
-
-
-
Polling RX  
Polling TX  
V.34 OFF  
Bulletin board registration  
Bulletin board polling reception  
Reference  
-
This machine sends faxes in ECM ON unless ECM OFF is specified.  
V.34 OFF  
V34 is a communication mode used for super G3 fax communication. When the remote machine or this ma-  
chine is connected to a telephone line via PBX, however, you may not establish a communication in the super  
G3 mode depending on telephone line conditions.  
In this case, it is recommended that you turn V34 off to send data. After sending has been completed, this  
machine automatically returns to the V34 mode.  
This function cannot be used together with the following functions.  
-
-
-
-
-
Polling RX  
Polling TX  
Bulletin board registration  
Bulletin board polling reception  
ECM OFF  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
5-58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
5.12  
Communication Settings  
5
Check Dest. & Send  
The specified fax number is compared with the remote fax number (CSI) and data is sent only when those  
fax numbers match. If they do not match, the communication will fail; therefore preventing a sending error.  
Reference  
-
To check the destination and send, the fax number of this machine must be registered with the recipi-  
ent's fax machine.  
Select Line  
If 2 units of the Fax Kit FK-502 are installed, you can select [Line 1] or [Line 2] to send a fax. Specify the line  
used for sending faxes. Selecting [Not Set] uses an idle one of lines 1 and 2 to send data. If both lines are  
idle, Line 1 is used first.  
Reference  
-
-
You cannot specify a line when [Line 2 Setting] is set to [RX Only] in [Multi Line Settings].  
To use two lines as external and extension lines, be sure to specify the line to be used. If you select [Not  
Set], a sending failure may occur.  
5.12.2 E-Mail Settings (E-mail/I-FAX)  
E-mail Settings  
Specify the Document Name, Subject, From and Body for sending E-mail messages.  
[Document Name]  
The name of the file to be saved is displayed. This document name can also be specified in [Document Name]  
of [Scan Settings]. The document name whichever is specified later will be applied to this column. You can  
enter up to 30 characters.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
5-59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
5.12  
Communication Settings  
5
[Subject]  
The text specified in the Utility menu is automatically displayed. To change the contents, press [Direct Input].  
You can enter up to 64 characters.  
[From]  
The E-mail address of the administrator specified in the Utility menu is displayed.  
Reference  
-
-
The E-mail address of this machine is used for Internet faxing.  
You cannot directly enter the address when [Change the "From" Address] is set to Restrict in Adminis-  
trator Settings - [System Settings] - [Restrict User Access] - [Restrict Access to Job Settings].  
[Body]  
The E-mail body specified in the Utility menu is displayed. To change the contents, press [Direct Input]. You  
can enter up to 256 characters.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
5-60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
5.12  
Communication Settings  
5
5.12.3 URL Notification Setting (FTP/SMB/WebDAV)  
URL Notification  
Specify the E-mail address to be notified about the completion of a job.  
Reference  
-
A destination for the User Box in the main unit, FTP, PC (SMB), and WebDAV operation can be specified  
for the destination in URL Notification Setting.  
-
URL Notification Setting does not function when sending E-mails, Internet faxes or G3 faxes.  
[Detail Search]  
You can search for E-mail addresses from the registered destinations. Enter the address name or a part of  
the address to search for the destination address. Select either [Name] or [Destination], and enter an index.  
[Direct Input]  
Enter the E-mail address in the touch panel.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
5-61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
5.12  
Communication Settings  
5
5.12.4 Communication Method Settings (G3)  
You can specify how to send or receive data.  
Quick Memory TX  
A method used to start sending fax immediately after scanning a page of the original. This method allows  
even originals with many pages to be sent without overflowing memory.  
Reference  
-
If the optional Security Kit SC-507 is installed, and [Security Details] [Copy Guard] or [Password  
Copy] is set to [Yes] in Administrator Settings, [Quick Memory TX] does not appear.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
5-62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
5.12  
Communication Settings  
5
Polling RX - Normal  
A function available on the receiver's side to request a sender to send set documents or documents to be  
transmitted through polling reservation in the sender's machine. This is convenient when communication  
costs are to be borne by the receiver.  
Select [Normal] and select the recipient.  
Polling RX - Bulletin  
A function available on the receiver's side to request a sender to send documents set in the sender's bulletin  
board.  
To receive documents stored in the bulletin board, select [Bulletin], enter the bulletin board number using  
keypad, and select the recipient.  
This function cannot be used together with the following functions.  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Quick Memory TX  
Memory TX  
Frame Erase  
Scan Size  
Total # of Pages (Quick Memory TX)  
Mixed Original  
Z-Folded Original  
Long Original  
Binding Position  
Polling TX  
Overseas TX  
ECM OFF  
Password TX  
F-Code TX  
V.34 OFF  
Separate Scan  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
5-63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
5.12  
Communication Settings  
5
Reference  
-
You can enter up to 9-digit number for the bulletin board number.  
Timer transmission (Timer TX)  
Specify the sending time. Transmitting faxes in discount telephone rate hours such as late at night or early in  
the morning will reduce the cost. Use the keypad to specify the communication starting time.  
Reference  
-
-
It is specified in hours and minutes.  
You cannot specify the date.  
Password transmission (Password TX)  
This function sends documents with a password. If the recipient's fax machine is set to closed network re-  
ception, the sender's fax machine should transmit the same password as used for the closed network recep-  
tion.  
You can use this function only when the remote machine is our model and supports the closed network re-  
ception (with password) function.  
Use the keypad to enter the password.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
5-64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
5.12  
Communication Settings  
5
Polling TX - Normal  
Used to save documents to be transmitted through reserved polling transmission based on a receiver's in-  
struction.  
Select [Normal] when scanning originals to save data in the Polling TX User Box.  
d
Reference  
For details on deleting or checking documents in the Polling TX User Box, refer to the [User's Guide Box Op-  
erations].  
Reference  
-
When user authentication is enabled, the user cannot perform polling transmission if the user is not per-  
mitted to access to the saved documents.  
Polling TX - Bulletin  
Used to save documents in the bulletin board to be transmitted based on a receiver's instruction.  
Select [Bulletin], enter the bulletin board number using the keypad, and scan the original. Documents are  
saved automatically in the Bulletin Board User Box that has been registered in advance.  
This function cannot be used together with the following functions.  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Quick Memory TX  
Memory TX  
Total # of Pages (Quick Memory TX)  
Polling TX  
Timer TX  
Overseas TX  
ECM OFF  
Password TX  
F-Code TX  
V.34 OFF  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
5-65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
5.12  
Communication Settings  
5
Reference  
-
For the bulletin board number, enter the box number between 1 to 999999999 of the Bulletin Board  
User Box that has been registered in advance.  
-
-
Only one document can be saved in a single bulletin board.  
You can create up to 10 bulletin boards for this machine.  
d
Reference  
For details on deleting or checking documents in the Bulletin Board User Box, refer to the [User's Guide Box  
Operations].  
F-Code transmission (F-Code TX)  
This function allows you send documents to a specific User Box of the remote machine by entering the SUB  
address and the password. Specific User Boxes include the followings.  
-
Confidential TX  
Documents are sent to the Confidential RX User Box of the remote machine. Enter the destination User  
Box number in the SUB Address box and the confidential transmission password in the Password box.  
-
Relay TX  
Documents are sent to the Relay Distribution User Box of the remote machine when the remote ma-  
chine supports the relay distribution function. Enter the Relay Distribution User Box number in the SUB  
Address box and the password in the Password box.  
Reference  
To use the F-Code for transmission, the remote machine must support the F-Code function.  
-
5.12.5 E-Mail Encryption (E-mail)  
This item is displayed when [S/MIME Communication Settings] is set to [ON] in Administrator Settings - [Net-  
work Settings] - [E-Mail Settings]. Specify whether to encrypt E-mails to be sent from this machine.  
d
Reference  
For details on the S/MIME Communication Settings, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator].  
5.12.6 Digital Signature (E-mail)  
This item is displayed when [S/MIME Communication Settings] is set to [ON] in Administrator Settings - [Net-  
work Settings] - [E-Mail Settings]. Select whether to add a digital signature to E-mails to be sent from this  
machine.  
Reference  
-
You may not be able to add a digital signature or you may be forced to add a digital signature depend-  
ing on the S/MIME communication settings.  
d
Reference  
For details on the S/MIME Communication Settings, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator].  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
5-66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
5.12  
Communication Settings  
5
5.12.7 Fax Header Settings (G3/IP/I-FAX)  
Specify whether to attach sender information (TTI) when sending documents. Select the sender name from  
the sender name list.  
Reference  
-
-
-
To register the contents of the header information to be added to the original, use [Header Information]  
in Administrator Settings. For details, refer to page 10-14.  
To register how the header information will be added, use [Header/Footer Position] in Administrator  
Settings. For details, refer to page 10-15.  
If two units of the Fax Kit FK-502 are installed, you can configure Fax Header Settings for each line.  
For details, refer to page 10-19.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
5-67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
5.13  
Redialing (G3/IP)  
5
5.13  
Redialing (G3/IP)  
Redialing refers to the operation to dial to the same destination again.  
If a fax cannot be sent for example because the recipient's line is busy, the machine redials after a specified  
period has elapsed.  
5.13.1 Auto redialing  
If a fax cannot be sent, for example because the recipient's line is busy, the machine automatically redials  
the same destination for the number of redials specified in Line Parameter Setting.  
The transmission job is handled as reserved job for redialing before the job is redialed.  
5.13.2 Manual redialing  
Redialing of a job for which the status is set to pending for redial, can be performed from the Job Details  
screen.  
Press the [Send] tab in [Job List] - [Job Details], select a job which status is Waiting To Redial, and press  
[Redial].  
5.13.3 Fax Retransmit (G3)  
The job, which could not be sent although the number of redials reached the value specified in Line Parameter  
Setting, is saved in Fax Retransmit User Box. Such jobs can be redialed manually by opening Fax Retransmit  
User Box.  
Press [Send], select the job that you want to send it again, and press [Fax].  
Reference  
-
To save a document in the Fax Retransmit User Box, you must configure the Incomplete TX Hold set-  
tings in Administrator Settings in advance. For details on the Incomplete TX Hold settings, refer to  
-
For details on the Fax Retransmit User Box, refer to the [User's Guide Box Operations].  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
5-68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6.1  
Receiving (G3: Without external telephone connected)  
6
6
Receiving (G3/IP/I-FAX)  
This section explains the types of fax reception and respective operations.  
6.1  
Receiving (G3: Without external telephone connected)  
6.1.1  
Auto RX (Dedicated for fax line)  
Specify this mode to use the telephone line dedicated for fax transmission. The machine automatically starts  
receiving fax data when it detects the ring signal for the specified times.  
Receiving  
Received  
document  
Automatically starts receiving fax data  
Reference  
-
To receive fax data in auto mode, Receive Mode must be set to [Auto RX] in [Line Parameter Setting]  
of the Utility menu.  
To use the telephone line dedicated for fax transmission, the following settings are required.  
-
-
External telephone: Not connected  
Line Parameter Setting - Receive Mode: Set to [Auto RX]  
d
Reference  
For details on Line Parameter Setting, refer to page 10-17.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
6-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
6.2  
Receiving (G3: With external telephone connected)  
6
6.2  
Receiving (G3: With external telephone connected)  
6.2.1  
Manual RX (Dedicated telephone line)  
It is convenient to set the machine to manual mode if an external telephone is connected to this machine and  
the line is primarily used for telephone communication.  
Receiving  
The external telephone continues to ring  
• A user picks up the phone and talks  
Reference  
-
To use the line dedicated for telephone communication, [Receive Mode] must be set to Manual RX in  
[Line Parameter Setting] of the Utility menu.  
To receive fax data manually by operating the control panel of this machine, when the external telephone  
rings, press [Off-Hook] in the Fax/Scan Mode screen, and make sure [RX] is selected. Press [Start] in the Off-  
Hook screen.  
To receive fax data manually, the following settings are required.  
-
-
External telephone: Connected (Answering machine OFF)  
Line Parameter Setting - Receive Mode: Set to [Manual RX]  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
6-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
6.3  
Receiving (I-FAX)  
6
6.3  
Receiving (I-FAX)  
E-mail messages can be received either automatically or manually. When this machine receives an E-mail  
message, the E-mail text and attachment file are printed automatically.  
Data is saved in the Memory RX User Box if [Memory RX Setting] is enabled in the Utility menu. The saved  
documents can be printed as needed.  
d
Reference  
For details on printing documents saved in the Memory RX User Box, refer to the [User's Guide Box Opera-  
tions].  
Reference  
-
This machine is capable of receiving E-mail data of maximum 3000 pages for attachment file and max-  
imum 20K byte for text.  
Receiving E-mails automatically  
The machine automatically checks the POP server for new E-mail messages at a predetermined time interval.  
Reference  
-
-
The interval for checking E-mail can be set from 1 to 60 minutes. For details on setting this function,  
refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator].  
It is set at 15 minutes by factory default.  
Receiving E-mails manually  
Press a button of this machine to check for E-mail messages to the POP server.  
Press [Receive I-Fax] in the Fax/Scan mode screen.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
6-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
6.4  
Receiving (IP)  
6
6.4  
Receiving (IP)  
This machine prints data automatically upon reception of IP Address Fax.  
Data is saved in the Memory RX User Box if [Memory RX Setting] is enabled in the Utility menu. The saved  
documents can be printed as needed.  
d
Reference  
For details on printing documents saved in the Memory RX User Box, refer to the [User's Guide Box Opera-  
tions].  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
6-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6.5  
In-memory proxy reception  
6
6.5  
In-memory proxy reception  
6.5.1  
In-memory proxy reception  
When it is unable to print a received document due to paper jamming, running short of consumables or other  
reasons, data is saved in the memory until the machine is ready to print it again. This function is referred to  
as In-memory proxy reception.  
-
After recovering from trouble such as paper jamming, the saved reception document is printed auto-  
matically.  
-
This function may not be available if the memory is full.  
6.5.2  
Forwarding of job after in-memory proxy reception (G3)  
If the machine is unable to recover from trouble, the job stored in the memory can be forwarded to another  
destination. In the [Job List] - [Job Details] screen, press the [Receive] tab. Select the job that you want to  
forward, and press [Forward]. Specify the destination and press [Start] to complete the job.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
6-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
6.6  
Printing upon data reception  
6
6.6  
Printing upon data reception  
When a document is received, the paper size of the received document is compared with the paper size in  
the paper tray, and the document is printed either by being reduced to the specified zoom ratio, or to the size  
that the document fits the paper size to be printed. If the machine is configured to print received documents  
in the same magnification, received documents are printed in full size regardless the paper size setting of the  
received documents.  
6.6.1  
Printing at reduced size  
When a standard-size document is received, it is printed according to the zoom ratio specified for the paper  
size. (Default: 96%)  
Original  
Received document  
Reduce the  
size ac-  
cording to  
the setting  
of [Min. Re-  
duction for  
RX Print]  
d
Reference  
For details on the zoom ratio setting, refer to page 10-19.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
6-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
6.6  
Printing upon data reception  
6
6.6.2  
Printing at reduced size to fit the paper size to be printed  
If a document size longer than the standard size is received, the optimal paper size is determined based on  
the width and length of the received document and printed accordingly. If the optimal-size paper is not load-  
ed in the paper tray, the document size is reduced to the near-size paper.  
Original  
Received document  
Reduce the  
size to fit  
onto paper  
The following describes the procedure to determine the optimal paper size and criteria for selecting the paper  
size.  
Step 1: Select optimal paper size  
Determines the optimal paper size based on the width and length of the received document according to the  
following rule.  
Width of re-  
ceived docu-  
ment  
Print posi-  
tion of recep-  
tion  
Length of received document  
information  
A4-width  
[OFF] or [In-  
side Body  
Text]  
0 to 150  
0 to 141  
151 to 305  
306 to 390  
391 or more  
[Outside Body  
Text]  
142 to 296  
297 to 381  
382 or more  
Paper size to be selected  
5-1/2 e8-1/2  
8-1/2 e11 w  
233 or more  
8-1/2 e14 w  
11 e17 w  
v
B4-width [OFF] or [In-  
0 to 232  
side Body  
Text]  
[Outside Body  
Text]  
0 to 223  
224 or more  
Paper size to be selected  
8-1/2 e11 v  
11 e17 w  
A3-width [OFF] or [In-  
0 to 232  
233 or more  
side Body  
Text]  
[Outside Body  
Text]  
0 to 223  
224 or more  
Paper size to be selected  
8-1/2 e11 v  
11 e17 w  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
6-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
6.6  
Printing upon data reception  
6
Width of re-  
ceived docu-  
ment  
Print posi-  
Length of received document  
tion of recep-  
tion  
information  
A4-width  
[OFF] or [In-  
side Body  
Text]  
0 to 154  
0 to 146  
155 to 314  
147 to 306  
315 to 386  
307 to 378  
387 or more  
[Outside Body  
Text]  
379 or more  
Paper size to be selected  
A5 v  
A4 w  
B4 w  
A3 w  
B4-width [OFF] or [In-  
0 to 195  
196 to 395  
396 or more  
side Body  
Text]  
[Outside Body  
Text]  
0 to 186  
187 to 386  
387 or more  
Paper size to be selected  
B5 v  
B4 w  
A3 w  
A3-width [OFF] or [In-  
0 to 226  
227 or more  
side Body  
Text]  
[Outside Body  
Text]  
0 to 217  
218 or more  
Paper size to be selected  
A4 v  
A3 w  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
6-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6.6  
Printing upon data reception  
6
Step 2: Select actual print paper size  
Checks whether the paper size determined in Step 1 is loaded in the machine or not.  
-
Optimal paper size loaded:  
Printing starts.  
-
Optimal paper size unavailable, or [Auto Tray Switch ON/OFF] (automatic paper tray switching function)  
of the paper tray is set to [Restrict]:  
The alternative paper size is searched for in the descending order as shown in the table. At this time, if  
[Print Separate Fax Pages] in the Utility mode is set to [ON], the paper size is searched for based on the  
precondition that the document is divided and printed on multiple pages.  
For details on [Auto Tray Switch ON/OFF], refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations].  
[Print Separate Fax Pages] is set to [OFF]:  
The print paper is searched for in the descending order.  
-
Even if [Print Separate Fax Pages] is set to [OFF], when a long original is received or a document is re-  
ceived in high resolution, the document may be divided and printed on multiple pages.  
Optimal paper size  
5-1/2 e8-  
8-1/2 e11  
8-1/2 e11 v 8-1/2 e14  
11 e17 w  
11 e17 w  
A3 w  
1/2 v  
w
w
Paper selection order  
(From top to bottom)  
5-1/2 e8-  
1/2 v  
8-1/2 e11  
w
8-1/2 e11 v 8-1/2 e14  
w
5-1/2 e8-  
1/2 w  
8-1/2 e11 v 8-1/2 e11  
11 e17 w  
w
A5 v  
A4 w  
A4 v  
B4 w  
B4 w  
A5 w  
A4 v  
A4 w  
A3 w  
8-1/2 e14  
w
8-1/2 e11  
w
8-1/2 e14  
w
8-1/2 e14  
w
8-1/2 e11  
w
8-1/2 e11  
w
8-1/2 e11 v 11 e17 w  
11 e17 w  
B4 w  
8-1/2 e11 v A4 w  
A4 w  
A4 v  
B5 v  
B5 w  
B4 w  
A4 w  
A3 w  
A3 w  
A4 v  
8-1/2 e14  
w
11 e17 w  
B4 w  
A3 w  
Optimal paper size  
A5 v  
A5 v  
A5 w  
A4 w  
A4 v  
B5 v  
B5 w  
B4 w  
A3 w  
A4 w  
B5 v  
B5 v  
B5 w  
B4 w  
A4 w  
A4 v  
A3 w  
B4 w  
A4 v  
A4 v  
A4 w  
B4 w  
A3 w  
A3 w  
Paper selection order  
(From top to bottom)  
A4 w  
A4 v  
B4 w  
A3 w  
A4 w  
A4 v  
A3 w  
B4 w  
A4 w  
B4 w  
A3 w  
[Print Separate Fax Pages] is set to [ON]:  
The print paper is searched for in the descending order.  
-
Even if [Print Separate Fax Pages] is set to [ON], when the width of the selected print paper is smaller  
than that of the image in the received document, the document size is reduced according to the paper  
width.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
6-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6.6  
Printing upon data reception  
Optimal paper size  
6
5-1/2 e8-  
8-1/2 e11  
8-1/2 e11 v 8-1/2 e14  
11 e17 w  
11 e17 w  
A3 w  
1/2 v  
w
w
Paper selection order  
(From top to bottom)  
5-1/2 e8-  
1/2 v  
8-1/2 e11  
w
8-1/2 e11 v 8-1/2 e14  
w
5-1/2 e8-  
1/2 w  
A4 w  
8-1/2 e11  
w
11 e17 w  
A5 v  
8-1/2 e14  
w
A4 v  
B4 w  
8-1/2 e11 v  
A5 w  
11 e17 w  
A4 w  
A3 w  
8-1/2 e11  
w
8-1/2 e11  
w
B4 w  
8-1/2 e14  
w
8-1/2 e11 v A4 v  
8-1/2 e11 v A3 w  
11 e17 w  
8-1/2 e11  
w
A4 w  
A4 w  
A4 v  
B5 v  
B5 w  
B4 w  
A4 v  
A3 w  
A4 w  
8-1/2 e14  
w
11 e17 w  
B4 w  
A3 w  
Optimal paper size  
A5 v  
A5 v  
A5 w  
A4 w  
A4 v  
B5 w  
B5 v  
B4 w  
A3 w  
A4 w  
A4 w  
B4 w  
A3 w  
B5 v  
B5 v  
B5 w  
B4 w  
A4 w  
A4 v  
A3 w  
B4 w  
A4 v  
A4 v  
A4 w  
B4 w  
A3 w  
A3 w  
Paper selection order  
(From top to bottom)  
B4 w  
B5 v  
B5 w  
A3 w  
A4 v  
A3 w  
A4 v  
A4 w  
A4 w  
For the paper sizes of B5 w, B5 v, A4 wand A4 v, the document is divided and printed on multiple pages.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
6-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6.6  
Printing upon data reception  
6
Restrictions for printing  
The following lists the restrictions on printing documents.  
-
-
Documents are printed in reduced size if the print paper size is smaller than that determined in Step 1.  
If [Print Separate Fax Pages] is set to [OFF], documents are automatically rotated by 90 degrees if the  
orientation of the print paper does not match with that determined in Step 1.  
-
-
-
To print multiple-page documents of mixed size, the functions and settings described in this section  
are determined for each page.  
If the paper size determined in Step 1 and 2 is loaded in multiple paper trays, the paper tray is selected  
according to the setting specified in [Auto Tray Selection Settings].  
If only the bypass tray is assigned for the thus determined paper size, feed paper from the bypass tray  
for printing. However, if the bypass tray is not included in the options of [Auto Tray Select] in [Auto Tray  
Selection Settings], the bypass tray cannot be used for feeding paper.  
-
If [Print Separate Fax Pages] is set to [ON], and [TX/RX Settings] in the Utility menu configured as fol-  
lows, documents are not divided.  
A specific tray is assigned in [Tray Selection for RX Print].  
[Min. Reduction for RX Print] is set to [Full Size].  
[Print Paper Selection] is set to [Fixed Size] or [Priority Size].  
[Duplex Print (RX)] is set to [ON].  
-
If the selected-size paper is not loaded in the paper tray, a message appears prompting you to load the  
paper of the size.  
If [Print Paper Selection] is set to [Priority Size], any one of the paper sizes 8-1/2 e11, 8-1/2 e14, or 11  
e17 (A4, B4, or A3) is selected as optimal paper size. If the selected-size paper is not loaded in the  
paper tray, the paper size is selected according to the normal procedure.  
If Print Paper Selection is set to Fixed Size, any one of the paper sizes 8-1/2 e11, 8-1/2 e14 or 11 e  
17 (A4, B4, or A3) is selected as optimal paper size. If the selected-size paper is not loaded in the paper  
tray, a message appears prompting you to supply the paper of the size. The message remains dis-  
played until the paper is loaded in the paper tray.  
If [Tray Selection for RX Print] is set to other than [Auto], documents are printed on the paper loaded in  
the paper tray (except the bypass tray) specified in [Tray Selection for RX Print]. If the specified paper  
size is smaller than that of the received document, the document is printed in reduced size. If the paper  
tray runs out of paper, a message appears prompting you to supply the paper of the size. The message  
remains displayed until the paper is loaded in the paper tray.  
If [Print Paper Selection] is set to other than [Auto Select] and [Tray Selection for RX Print] is set to other  
than [Auto], higher priority is given to the setting in [Tray Selection for RX Print].  
d
Reference  
For details on [Print Separate Fax Pages], refer to page 10-19.  
For details on [Auto Tray Selection Settings], refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations].  
For details on [Tray Selection for RX Print], [Min. Reduction for RX Print], [Print Paper Selection] and [Duplex  
Print (RX)], refer to page 10-19.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
6-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6.6  
Printing upon data reception  
6
6.6.3  
Printing at full size  
If [Min. Reduction for RX Print] is set to [Full Size] in the Utility menu, documents are printed on the paper of  
the same size at the same magnification. If the same-size paper is not available, it is printed on the paper  
larger than the original size.  
Original  
Received document  
Print at  
full size  
Reference  
-
-
-
A document cannot be divided to print on multiple pages.  
The image size larger than 11 e17 (A3) cannot be printed.  
If the paper tray of the optimal paper size runs out of paper, a message appears prompting you to sup-  
ply the paper of the size. The message remains displayed until the paper is loaded in the paper tray.  
6.6.4  
Printing method upon data reception  
The following describes the relationship between the paper size of the received document and the paper size  
to be printed.  
Paper size of received doc- [Min. Reduction for RX Print] setting  
ument  
If a specific tray is  
assigned in [Tray  
Selection for RX  
Print]  
Full Size  
96 to 87 %  
Standard size (11 e17 to 5-  
1/2 e8-1/2 (A3 to A5))  
Printed on the same  
paper size at the  
same scale  
Printed on the same  
paper size at reduced  
scale  
Printed on the paper  
of specified paper  
tray at reduced scale  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
6-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
6.6  
Printing upon data reception  
6
Paper size of received doc- [Min. Reduction for RX Print] setting  
ument  
If a specific tray is  
assigned in [Tray  
Selection for RX  
Print]  
Full Size  
96 to 87 %  
Printed on long paper  
(longer than standard  
size)  
Printed on the opti-  
mal paper size at re-  
duced scale  
Printed on the paper  
of specified paper  
tray at reduced scale  
Printed on the same  
or larger paper at the  
same scale  
Printed on the same  
or larger paper at the  
same scale  
Printed on the paper  
of specified paper  
tray at reduced scale  
Printed on divided  
pages depending on  
the paper size  
Reference  
-
If [Duplex Print (RX)] is set to [ON], double-sided printing is possible. For details, refer to page 10-19.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
6-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6.7  
Footer Position  
6
6.7  
Footer Position  
Reception date, time, reception number and page number are automatically added to the received document  
for printing. The received information is printed on the following location of the document according to the  
[Header/Footer Position] setting.  
Reference  
-
To send a document in color using the IP Address Fax function, the information is printed only within  
the original image area.  
d
Reference  
For details on the setting of reception information, refer to page 10-15.  
Inside Body Text  
The reception information is printed so that it is overlaid on part of the original image.  
2005/01/20 13:43  
R001 P.001/003  
Outside Body Text  
The reception information is printed on the outside of the original image area.  
2005/01/20 13:43  
R001 P.001/003  
Not Printed  
If [OFF] is selected, the reception information is not printed.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
6-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
7 Convenient functions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.1  
Memory RX (G3/IP/I-FAX)  
7
7
Convenient functions (G3/IP/I-FAX)  
This section explains the convenient functions for fax transmission.  
7.1  
Memory RX (G3/IP/I-FAX)  
Received documents can be saved and printed as required. This function is referred to as memory reception.  
Received documents are saved in the Memory RX User Box. Access the User Box and print the document.  
Unnecessary documents can be deleted as well.  
d
Reference  
For details on printing or deleting documents saved in User Boxes, refer to the [User's Guide Box Operations].  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
7-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
7.2  
PC-Fax RX (G3)  
7
7.2  
PC-Fax RX (G3)  
A function to save document data, when received by fax, to User Boxes in the machine's internal hard disk.  
The saved data can be printed or sent. Memory RX User Box or any User Boxes specified are used as saving  
destination User Boxes.  
3
3
1
2
1000  
2000  
1. Sender  
2. Original  
3. Hard disk  
This function cannot be used together with the following functions.  
-
-
-
Memory RX  
Fax Forwarding  
TSI Distribution  
d
Reference  
For details on printing, sending, or deleting documents saved in User Boxes, refer to the [User's Guide Box  
Operations].  
For details on PC-Fax RX Setting, refer to page 10-25.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
7-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
7.3  
TSI Distribution (G3)  
7
7.3  
TSI Distribution (G3)  
Documents received with the fax ID of the sender (TSI) can be automatically distributed to the forwarding des-  
tinations prepared for each sender. The following destinations can be specified for forwarding.  
-
-
-
-
-
User Box  
E-Mail Address  
FTP  
SMB  
WebDAV  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
1. Sender  
2. Save in User Box  
3. User Box  
4. E-mail distribution  
5. Mail server  
6. FTP distribution  
7. FTP server  
8. Shared folder distribution  
9. SMB server  
10. WebDAV distribution  
11. WebDAV server  
Reference  
-
-
The received document is printed if it could not be distributed successfully.  
Up to 128 locations can be registered for forwarding destination TSI.  
d
Reference  
For details on TSI User Box Settings, refer to page 10-25.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
7-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
7.4  
Confidential RX (G3)  
7
7.4  
Confidential RX (G3)  
A function to transmit an original between you and specific persons using the Confidential User Box. Sending  
an original to a Confidential User Box of the recipient machine is referred to as confidential transmission, and  
receiving an original in a Confidential User Box of your machine is referred to as confidential reception. This  
function is available only if the recipient's machine is capable of handling F code.  
1
2
3
1. Send  
2. Confidential user box  
3. Receive  
Settings required for confidential reception  
To receive data by confidential reception, create a User Box to be used for confidential reception in this ma-  
chine. The setting for confidential reception can be specified when creating a Public, Personal, or Group User  
Box in the hard disk of this machine.  
d
Reference  
For details on the Confidential RX setting when creating a User Box, refer to the [User's Guide Box Opera-  
tions].  
Receiving by confidential reception  
When a document is received by confidential reception, it is saved in a Confidential User Box. Access the  
User Box and print the document. Unnecessary documents can be deleted as well.  
d
Reference  
For details on printing or deleting documents saved in User Boxes, refer to the [User's Guide Box Operations].  
Sending by confidential transmission  
To send a fax by confidential transmission, enter the box number of the destination Confidential RX User Box  
and password.  
For details on confidential transmission, refer to page 5-66.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
7-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
7.5  
Relay distribution (G3)  
7
7.5  
Relay distribution (G3)  
7.5.1  
Description of relay distribution  
A function to send fax via a relay distribution station. When a document is sent by fax, it is saved in a relay  
distribution station and forwarded to the destination afterwards. When there are multiple broadcast destina-  
tions at distant places, by grouping the broadcast destinations to the relay station for each region, the entire  
amount of the communication charges can be reduced by doing the relay transmission from the relaying sta-  
tion.  
1
2
3
4
5
1. Relay instruction station  
2. Long-distance call  
3. Relay distribution station  
4. Local call  
5. Relay distribution destination  
-
-
-
The fax machine that requests a relay transmission and sends a document is referred to as [relay in-  
struction station].  
The fax machine that receives fax data from the relay instruction station and relays it to the destination  
is referred to as [relay distribution station].  
This function is available only if the relay distribution station's machine is capable of handling F code.  
This function cannot be used together with the following functions.  
-
-
-
-
-
Polling TX  
Polling RX  
Bulletin board registration  
Bulletin board polling reception  
Password TX  
7.5.2  
To perform relay distribution  
This machine can serve as a relay instruction station and relay distribution station.  
To use this machine as a relay instruction station for sending fax data, refer to page 7-7.  
To use this machine as a relay distribution station, the Relay User Box for saving documents for relay distri-  
bution and the destinations must be registered to this machine.  
To specify a group of destinations, the group must first be registered.  
d
Reference  
For details on registering the Relay User Box, refer to the [User's Guide Box Operations].  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
7-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
7.5  
Relay distribution (G3)  
7
7.5.3  
Sending fax to the relay distribution station  
Select [F-Code TX] in [Communication Settings] - [Communication Method Settings], and configure the fol-  
lowing settings.  
[SUB Address]: Enter the Relay User Box number of the relay distribution station using the keypad.  
[Password]: Enter the relay password.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
7-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
7.6  
Polling TX/RX (G3)  
7
7.6  
Polling TX/RX (G3)  
7.6.1  
Polling TX  
A function to save documents in the internal hard disk to send it based on a receiver's polling instruction. For  
details on saving documents in the Polling Transmission User Box, refer to page 5-65.  
-
When a document is specified for polling transmission, it is saved in the Polling Transmission User Box  
in the System User Box.  
-
-
Only one document can be saved in the Polling Transmission User Box.  
The saved document is specified for memory transmission automatically.  
This function cannot be used together with the following functions.  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Quick Memory TX  
Total # of Pages (Quick Memory TX)  
Polling RX  
Timer TX  
Overseas TX  
ECM OFF  
F-Code TX  
Password TX  
V.34 OFF  
Bulletin board registration  
Bulletin board polling reception  
7.6.2  
Polling RX  
A function available on the receiver's side to request a sender to send saved documents or documents to be  
transmitted through polling reservation in the sender's machine. This is convenient when communication  
costs are to be borne by the receiver. For details on Polling RX, refer to page 5-65.  
This function cannot be used together with the following functions.  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Quick Memory TX  
Frame Erase  
Scan Size  
Total # of Pages (Quick Memory TX)  
Mixed Original  
Z-Folded Original  
Long Original  
Binding Position  
Confidential transmission  
Relay request  
Polling TX  
Overseas TX  
ECM OFF  
Password TX  
V.34 OFF  
Bulletin board registration  
Bulletin board polling reception  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
7-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
7.7  
Bulletin (G3)  
7
7.7  
Bulletin (G3)  
A function to register a bulletin board, and to register a posting documents to be viewed. To register a bulletin  
board, first register the Bulletin Board User Box, and then save the document using the User Box mode.  
Documents posted on the bulletin board can be taken out, deleted or printed by accessing through the Bul-  
letin Board User Box.  
3
1
2
4
1. View  
2. Register  
3. Bulletin board  
4. Polling  
d
Reference  
For details on registering and operating the Bulletin Board User Box, refer to the [User's Guide Box Opera-  
tions].  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
7-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
7.8  
Fax transmission using extension lines (G3)  
7
7.8  
Fax transmission using extension lines (G3)  
If two units of the Fax Kit FK-502 are installed, different functionality can be specified to the second line by  
configuring separately. The following shows the available functions.  
-
Line Parameter Setting: The dialing scheme, number of incoming rings, and line monitoring sound can  
be specified.  
-
-
-
Function Settings: The PC-FAX transmission settings can be configured.  
Multi Line Settings: Role of the line such as TX Only and RX Only can be assigned.  
Sender Fax No.: Sender fax ID can be assigned to the extension line individually.  
Reference  
These functions can be specified in [Fax Settings] - [Multi Line Settings] in Administrator Settings. For  
details, refer to page 10-29.  
-
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
7-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
7.9  
Fax forwarding (G3)  
7
7.9  
Fax forwarding (G3)  
Received documents can be forwarded to the pre-set destination. The following shows the available func-  
tions.  
-
-
This machine can be configured so that it forwards the document and prints the same document.  
If two units of Fax Kit FK-502 are installed, specify the line used to forward received faxes.  
Reference  
These functions can be specified in [Fax Settings] - [Function Settings] - [Forward TX Setting] in Admin-  
istrator Settings. For details, refer to page 10-23.  
-
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
7-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
8 Description of reports and  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8.1  
Types of reports and lists  
8
8
Description of reports and lists  
This section explains how to print various reports and lists and provides descriptions.  
8.1  
Types of reports and lists  
Reports and lists printed with this machine are as follows.  
8.1.1  
Reports  
There are reports that are printed automatically, reports for which printing method can be specified, and re-  
ports that are printed upon requests.  
Report name  
Description  
[Activity Report]  
(G3/I-FAX/IP)  
This report contains the transmission and reception log. The report can con-  
tain up to 700 records in total, and in separate pages for transmission log and  
reception log.  
The Activity Report is printed automatically, allowing you to print the trans-  
mission log, reception log, or both of the transmission and reception log each  
as needed.  
Printing interval can be selected from [Daily], [Every 100 Comm.], [100/Daily]  
in Administrator Settings of the Utility menu.  
If you have specified the output timing of activity reports to [Daily] or  
[100/Daily], specify the report output times accordingly.  
Press [Job List]>[Job Details]>[Send]>[Job History]>[Comm. List]>[Fax TX  
List] or [Fax RX List] to print the following reports.  
TX Report  
RX Report  
Activity Report  
[TX Result Report]  
(G3/I-FAX/IP)  
The result of transmission is printed automatically. Select the print timing  
from ON, If TX Fails, or OFF in Administrator Settings of the Utility menu.  
[Polling TX Report]  
(G3)  
The result of polling transmission is printed automatically if [TX Result Re-  
port] is set to [ON] or [If TX Fails] in [Report Settings] of the Utility menu.  
[Polling RX Report]  
(G3)  
The result of polling reception is printed automatically if [TX Result Report] is  
set to [ON] or [If TX Fails] in [Report Settings] in the Utility menu.  
[Sequential Polling RX  
Report]  
(G3)  
The result of polling transmission to multiple destinations is printed automat-  
ically if [Sequential TX Report] is set to [ON] in [Report Settings] of the Utility  
menu.  
[Broadcast Report]  
(G3/I-FAX/IP)  
This report is printed automatically upon completion of a sequential broad-  
cast transmission if [Sequential TX Report] is set to [ON] in [Report Settings]  
of the Utility menu.  
[Reservation Communi-  
cation Report]  
(G3)  
This report is printed automatically when a transmission is reserved if [Timer  
Reservation TX Report] is set to [ON] in [Report Settings] of the Utility menu.  
[Reservation Polling TX  
Report]  
(G3)  
This report is printed automatically when a polling transmission is reserved if  
[Timer Reservation TX Report] is set to [ON] in [Report Settings] of the Utility  
menu.  
[Broadcast Reserved Re- This report is printed automatically when a sequential broadcast transmis-  
port]  
(G3)  
sion is reserved if [Timer Reservation TX Report] is set to [ON] in [Report Set-  
tings] of the Utility menu.  
[An address Polling Rx  
Reserved Report]  
(G3)  
This report is printed automatically when a polling to a single destination is  
reserved if [Timer Reservation TX Report] is set to [ON] in [Report Settings]  
in the Utility menu.  
[Sequence Polling Rx Re- This report is printed automatically when a polling to multiple destinations is  
served Report]  
(G3)  
reserved if [Timer Reservation TX Report] is set to [ON] in [Report Settings]  
of the Utility mode.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
8-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
8.1  
Types of reports and lists  
Report name  
8
Description  
[Confidential Rx Report]  
(G3)  
This report is printed automatically upon reception of a confidential docu-  
ment if [Confidential Rx Report] is set to [ON] in [Report Settings] of the Utility  
mode.  
[Polling TX Report]  
(G3)  
The result of transmission to the bulletin board is printed automatically if [Bul-  
letin TX Report] is set to [ON] in [Report Settings] in the Utility menu.  
[Relay TX Result Report]  
(G3)  
The result of relay distribution is printed automatically if [Relay TX Result Re-  
port] is set to [ON] in [Report Settings] in the Utility menu.  
[Relay Request Report]  
(G3)  
The result of relay RX is printed automatically if [Relay Request Report] is set  
to [ON] in [Report Settings] of the Utility menu.  
[PC-Fax TX Error Report]  
(G3)  
This report is printed automatically when an error occurs during PC-Fax  
transmission if [PC-Fax TX Error Report] is set to [ON] in [Report Settings] of  
the Utility menu.  
[Network Fax RX Error  
Report]  
(I-FAX/IP)  
This report is printed when an error occurs during reception of network fax if  
[Network Fax RX Error Report] is set to [ON] in [Report Settings] of the Utility  
menu.  
[Print MDN Message]  
(I-FAX)  
If [MDN Message] is set to [ON] in [Report Settings] in the Utility menu, an  
MDN message is printed automatically when receiver respond to the send-  
er's delivery confirmation request. (The acronym for Message Disposition  
Notifications)  
[Print DSN Message]  
(I-FAX)  
If [DSN Message] is set to [ON] in [Report Settings] of the Utility menu, a DSN  
message is printed automatically when sender receives the message send  
back from receiver's mail server upon reception of an E-mail. (The acronym  
for Delivery Status Notifications)  
[Print E-mail Message  
Body]  
(I-FAX)  
The text of the received E-mail message is printed automatically if [Print E-  
mail Message Body] is set to [ON] in [Report Settings] of the Utility menu.  
8.1.2  
Lists  
To print a list, instruct the machine to print as needed.  
List name  
Description  
[Address Book List]  
[Group List]  
Print the details of the address book entries.  
The details of the group entries can be printed.  
The details of the program destination entries can be printed.  
The details of the fax setting in the Utility mode can be printed.  
Print the subjects and texts of the registered E-mail message.  
[Program List]  
[Job Settings List]  
[E-Mail Subject/Text List]  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
8-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
8.2  
Common lists  
8
8.2  
Common lists  
8.2.1  
[Address Book List]  
The list of the address book entries can be printed.  
How to print  
1
Select [Address Book List] from [One-Touch/User Box Registration] - [One-Touch/User Box Registra-  
tion List] in Administrator Settings, specify the starting number, the number of entries, and the destina-  
tion type, and then press [Print].  
2
Configure the Paper Tray and Simplex/Duplex settings, and then press [Start].  
Print sample  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
8-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
8.2  
Common lists  
8
Information included in the list  
Information included in the list varies depending on the type of address book.  
Fax  
Item  
Description  
[No.]  
Address book registration number (One touch number).  
Index characters used for search.  
[*] (Index)  
[Name]  
Name representing the registered destination.  
Registered fax number.  
[G3 FAX]  
[Line Settings]  
* appears if the line setting is configured.  
Registered recipient's machine type (monochrome/color machine).  
[Machine Type of Desti-  
nation]  
[Port Number]  
[SIP-Fax]  
Registered port number.  
This machine does not support SIP fax.  
Registered access allowed level.  
[Apply Level/Referable  
Group]  
Internet Fax  
Item  
Description  
[No.]  
Address book registration number (One touch number).  
Index characters used for search.  
Name representing the registered destination.  
Registered Internet fax address.  
Registered compression type.  
Registered paper size.  
[*] (Index)  
[Name]  
[Internet Fax Address]  
[Compression Type]  
[Paper Size]  
[Resolution]  
Registered resolution.  
[Apply Level/Referable  
Group]  
Registered access allowed level.  
IP Address Fax  
Item  
Description  
[No.]  
Address book registration number (One touch number).  
Index characters used for search.  
[*] (Index)  
[Name]  
[IP Address]  
Name representing the registered destination.  
IP address, host name, or E-mail address that is registered.  
Registered recipient's machine type (monochrome/color machine).  
[Machine Type of Desti-  
nation]  
[Port Number]  
Registered port number.  
[Apply Level/Referable  
Group]  
Registered access allowed level.  
SMB  
Item  
Description  
[No.]  
Address book registration number (One touch number).  
Index characters used for search.  
Name representing the registered destination.  
Registered PC address.  
[*] (Index)  
[Name]  
[Host Address]  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
8-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
8.2  
Common lists  
8
Item  
Description  
[File Path]  
[User ID]  
[Password]  
Registered file path.  
Registered user ID.  
Registered password. (The password is indicated by [********].)  
Registered access allowed level.  
[Apply Level/Referable  
Group]  
E-mail  
Item  
Description  
[No.]  
Address book registration number (One touch number).  
Index characters used for search.  
Name representing the registered destination.  
Registered E-mail address.  
[*] (Index)  
[Name]  
[E-Mail Address]  
[Apply Level/Referable  
Group]  
Registered access allowed level.  
FTP  
Item  
Description  
[No.]  
Address book registration number (One touch number).  
Index characters used for search.  
[*] (Index)  
[Name]  
Name representing the registered destination.  
Registered PC address.  
[Host Address]  
[File Path]  
[User ID]  
[Password]  
[anonymous]  
[PASV]  
Registered file path.  
Registered user ID.  
Registered password. (The password is indicated by [********].)  
Whether to allow anonymous users to access or not is displayed.  
Whether the PASV mode is enabled or not is displayed.  
Whether to use a proxy server or not is displayed.  
Registered port number.  
[Proxy]  
[Port Number]  
[Apply Level/Referable  
Group]  
Registered access allowed level.  
WebDAV  
Item  
Description  
[No.]  
Address book registration number (One touch number).  
Index characters used for search.  
Name representing the registered destination.  
Registered PC address.  
[*] (Index)  
[Name]  
[Host Address]  
[File Path]  
[User ID]  
Registered file path.  
Registered user ID.  
[Password]  
[Proxy]  
Registered password. (The password is indicated by [********].)  
Whether to use a proxy server or not is displayed.  
Whether to use SSL or not is displayed.  
Registered port number.  
[SSL Settings]  
[Port Number]  
[Apply Level/Referable  
Group]  
Registered access allowed level.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
8-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8.2  
Common lists  
8
User Box  
Item  
Description  
[No.]  
Address book registration number (One touch number).  
Index characters used for search.  
Name representing the registered destination.  
Registered User Box number.  
[*] (Index)  
[Name]  
[User Box Number]  
[Apply Level/Referable  
Group]  
Registered access allowed level.  
8.2.2  
[Group List]  
Prints the list of the group entries registered.  
How to print  
1
Select [Group List] from [One-Touch/User Box Registration] - [One-Touch/User Box Registration List]  
in Administrator Settings, specify the starting number, the number of entries, and the destination type,  
and then press [Print].  
2
Configure the Paper Tray and Simplex/Duplex settings, and then press [Start].  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
8-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
8.2  
Common lists  
8
Print sample  
Information included in the list  
Item  
Description  
[No.]  
Group number.  
[Name]  
[Addr. No.]  
Name representing the registered group.  
Address book registration number (One touch number) registered for the  
group.  
[Access Allowed Level]  
[Regist Count]  
Registered access allowed level.  
The number of address book registration numbers (One Touch numbers)  
registered for the group.  
8.2.3  
[Program List]  
Prints the list of the program destination entries registered.  
How to print  
1
Select [Program List] from [One-Touch/User Box Registration] - [One-Touch/User Box Registration List]  
in Administrator Settings, specify the starting number, the number of entries, and the destination type,  
and then press [Print].  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
8-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
8.2  
Common lists  
8
2
Configure the Paper Tray and Simplex/Duplex settings, and then press [Start].  
Print sample  
Information included in the list  
Item  
Description  
[No.]  
Program destination number.  
Name representing the program group registered.  
Address book registration number.  
[Name]  
[Address Book]  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
8-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
8.3  
Reports/lists commonly used among G3/IP/I-FAX  
8
8.3  
Reports/lists commonly used among G3/IP/I-FAX  
8.3.1  
[Activity Report]  
This report contains the transmission and reception log. The report can contain up to 700 records in total,  
and in separate pages for transmission log and reception log. The Activity Report is printed automatically.  
Also, only the transmission log (TX Report), reception log (RX Report) or both of the transmission and recep-  
tion log (Activity Report) can be printed as needed.  
Print sample  
Information included in the list  
Item  
Description  
[No.]  
Serial numbers assigned to transmission and receptions respectively.  
[Addressee]  
One of the followings is printed. This column is left blank if no information is  
available.  
TX Report: name registered in the address book or program  
RX Report: Name registered in the address book or telephone number of the  
recipient  
[Start Time]  
[Time]  
The starting time of the communication.  
The duration of the communication.  
[Prints]  
The number of transmitted/received document pages. For memory transmis-  
sion, the number of pages transmitted successfully and the total number of  
pages are printed as a factional number.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
8-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
8.3  
Reports/lists commonly used among G3/IP/I-FAX  
8
Item  
Description  
[Note]  
One of the followings is printed.  
[L1]: Main line (G3 only)  
[L2]: Sub line (G3 only)  
[TMR]: Timer TX  
[POL]: Polling  
[ORG]: Original size specified  
[FME]: Frame erase  
[MIX]: Sent by mixed original mode  
[CALL]: Manual transmission  
[CSRC]: Remote diagnosis  
[FWD]: Forward  
[PC]:PC-FAX  
[BND]: Binding Position  
[SP]: Special original  
[FCODE]:F-Code specified  
[RTX]: Re-transmission  
[RLY]: Relay  
[MBX]: Confidential  
[BUL]: Bulletin board  
[SIP]: This machine does not support SIP fax.  
[IPADR]: IP Address Fax  
[I-FAX]: Internet Fax  
[Result]  
[OK]: Printed if the communication is complete successfully.  
[S-OK]: Printed if the communication is interrupted.  
[PW-OFF]: Printed if the power switch is turned off during communication.  
[TEL]: Printed if the machine receives a phone call.  
[NG]: Printed if a communication error occurs.  
[Continue]: Printed if a transmission error has occurred and the job is put in  
a queue for retransmission (error page redial).  
[No Response]: Printed if no response is returned from the recipient.  
[Busy]: Printed if the recipient's line is busy and the communication failed.  
[Memory Full]: Printed if a fax could not be received because the memory  
was full.  
[LOVR]: Printed if the length of document page to be received exceeds the  
limit. (IP Address Fax/Internet Fax)  
[POVR]: The upper limit of received pages is exceeded. This message is  
printed if the number of document pages to be received exceeds 3000. (IP  
Address Fax/Internet Fax)  
[FIL]: File error. Printed if the machine does not support the received file for-  
mat. (IP Address Fax/Internet Fax)  
[DC]: Decoding error. Printed if decoding error occurs in the received file. (IP  
Address Fax/Internet Fax)  
[MDN]: Printed if the MDN response fails. (Internet Fax)  
[DSN]: Printed if the DSN response fails. (Internet Fax)  
Reference  
-
In the remarks column, you can print a user name when user authentication is enabled, or account  
name when account track is enabled. For details, refer to page 10-27.  
-
Some of the items may not be printed depending on the option settings.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
8-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8.3  
Reports/lists commonly used among G3/IP/I-FAX  
8
8.3.2  
[TX Result Report]  
The result of transmission is printed automatically. Select the print timing from ON, If TX Fails, or OFF in Ad-  
ministrator Settings of the Utility menu.  
8.3.3  
[Broadcast Report]  
Printed automatically when a sequential broadcast transmission is completed.  
You can enable or disable this report to be printed in [Sequential TX Report] in the Utility menu. In addition,  
you can specify the printing timing (All Destinations/Each Destination) in [Broadcast Result Report].  
8.3.4  
[Job Settings List]  
Print the job settings list of this machine.  
How to print  
%
Select [Fax Settings] - [Job Settings List] in Administrator Settings, and configure the Paper Tray and  
Simplex/Duplex settings, and then press [Start].  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
8-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
8.3  
Reports/lists commonly used among G3/IP/I-FAX  
8
[Fax Setting List]  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
8-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
8.3  
Reports/lists commonly used among G3/IP/I-FAX  
8
[Relay List]  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
8-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
8.3  
Reports/lists commonly used among G3/IP/I-FAX  
8
[Sender (TSI) RX User Box]  
[Confidential/Bulletin List]  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
8-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
8.4  
Report printed for G3 fax  
8
8.4  
Report printed for G3 fax  
8.4.1  
8.4.2  
8.4.3  
[Polling TX Report]  
The result of polling transmission is printed automatically.  
You can select ON, If TX Fails, or OFF from [TX Result Report] in the Utility menu.  
[Polling RX Report]  
Printed automatically when a polling document is received.  
You can select ON, If TX Fails, or OFF from [TX Result Report] in the Utility menu.  
[Sequential Polling RX Report]  
The result of polling reception to multiple destinations is printed automatically.  
You can enable or disable this report to be printed in [Sequential TX Report] in the Utility menu.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
8-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
8.4  
Report printed for G3 fax  
8
8.4.4  
[Reservation Communication Report]  
Printed automatically when a timer transmission is specified.  
You can enable or disable this report to be printed in [Timer Reservation TX Report] in the Utility menu.  
8.4.5  
[Reservation Polling TX Report]  
Printed automatically when a polling transmission is reserved (when a document is saved in the Polling Trans-  
mission User Box of this machine).  
You can enable or disable this report to be printed in [Timer Reservation TX Report] in the Utility menu.  
8.4.6  
[Broadcast Reserved Report]  
Printed automatically when a sequential broadcast transmission is reserved.  
You can enable or disable this report to be printed in [Timer Reservation TX Report] in the Utility menu.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
8-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
8.4  
Report printed for G3 fax  
8
8.4.7  
[An address Polling Rx Reserved Report]  
Printed automatically when a polling reception to single destination is reserved.  
You can enable or disable this report to be printed in [Timer Reservation TX Report] in the Utility menu.  
8.4.8  
[Sequence Polling Rx Reserved Report]  
Printed automatically when a polling reception to multiple destinations is reserved.  
You can enable or disable this report to be printed in [Timer Reservation TX Report] in the Utility menu.  
8.4.9  
[Confidential Rx Report]  
Printed automatically when a confidential document is received.  
You can enable or disable this report to be printed in [Confidential Rx Report] in the Utility menu.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
8-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
8.4  
Report printed for G3 fax  
8
8.4.10 [Bulletin TX Report](Polling TX Report)  
Printed automatically when a polling transmission is executed to the document saved in the bulletin board.  
You can enable or disable this report to be printed in [Bulletin TX Report] in the Utility menu.  
8.4.11 [Relay TX Result Report]  
This report is printed automatically upon transmission of a document to the relay distribution destination  
when this machine functioned as the relay distribution station.  
You can enable or disable this report to be printed in [Relay TX Result Report] in the Utility menu.  
8.4.12 [Relay Request Report]  
When this machine is used as the relay distribution station, this report is printed automatically upon reception  
of a document from the relay instruction station.  
You can enable or disable this report to be printed in [Relay Request Report] in the Utility menu.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
8-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
8.4  
Report printed for G3 fax  
8
8.4.13 [PC-Fax TX Error Report]  
Printed automatically when an error occurs in PC-FAX transmission.  
You can enable or disable this report to be printed in [PC-Fax TX Error Report] in the Utility menu.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
8-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
8.5  
Report printed for Internet Fax  
8
8.5  
Report printed for Internet Fax  
8.5.1  
[Internet Fax Rx Error Report]  
Printed automatically when the reception of Internet Fax or IP Address Fax fails.  
You can enable or disable this report to be printed in [Network Fax RX Error Report] in the Utility menu.  
8.5.2  
[Print MDN Message]  
When the sender (this machine) requests the recipient's machine to confirm that the E-mail message is un-  
sealed, the receiver sends an MDN message to the sender upon unsealing (printing) of the E-mail message.  
When this machine receives an MDN response message, and prints automatically.  
You can specify whether to print or not in [MDN Message] in the Utility menu.  
8.5.3  
[Print DSN Message]  
A DSN message is returned from the receiver to the sender when the E-mail message is delivered to the re-  
ceiver's mail server. When this machine receives the DSN message, it is printed automatically. (The acronym  
for Delivery Status Notifications)  
You can specify whether to print or not in [DSN Message] in the Utility menu.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
8-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
8.5  
Report printed for Internet Fax  
8
8.5.4  
[Print E-mail Message Body]  
Specify whether to print the body of the received E-mail message automatically or not.  
You can specify whether to print or not in [Print E-mail Message Body] in the Utility menu.  
Reference  
-
Even if [Print E-mail Message Body] is set to [ON], the body of the received E-mail message is not print-  
ed if "Content-XCIAJWNETFAX:IGNORE" is included in the header, or there is no text in the body.  
-
If the received attachment file is prohibited for printing, this machine behaves according to the [Network  
Fax RX Error Report] setting.  
8.5.5  
[Title/Text List]  
Print the list of the subjects and texts of the registered E-mail message.  
How to print  
%
Select [E-Mail Subject/Text List] from [One-Touch/User Box Registration] - [One-Touch/User Box Reg-  
istration List] in Administrator Settings, configure Paper Tray and Simplex/Duplex settings, and then  
press [Start].  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
8-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
8.5  
Report printed for Internet Fax  
8
Print sample  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
8-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
8.6  
Report printed for IP  
8
8.6  
Report printed for IP  
8.6.1  
[Network Fax RX Error Report]  
For details, refer to page 8-21.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
8-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.1  
Menu trees in User mode  
9
9
User Mode Settings  
9.1  
Menu trees in User mode  
The following setting items are available from the Utility (User mode). The menu tree contains the items that  
relate to Network Scan, G3 Fax and Network Fax.  
9.1.1  
[One-Touch/User Box Registration]  
First level  
Second level  
Third level  
Fourth level  
1 [Create One-  
Touch Destina-  
tion]  
1 [Address Book  
(Public)]  
1 [E-Mail] (p. 9-7)  
1/2  
[No.]  
[Name]  
[E-Mail  
Address]  
2/2  
[Index]  
[Icon]  
2 [User Box]  
[No.]  
[Name]  
[User Box]  
[Index]  
[Icon]  
3 [Fax] (p. 9-9)  
1/2  
2/2  
[No.]  
[Name]  
[Fax  
Number]  
[Line Set-  
tings]  
[Index]  
[Icon]  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
9-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
9.1  
Menu trees in User mode  
9
First level  
Second level  
Third level  
Fourth level  
4 [PC (SMB)]  
1/3  
[No.]  
[Name]  
[User ID]  
[Pass-  
word]  
2/3  
[Host Ad-  
dress]  
[File Path]  
[Refer-  
ence]  
3/3  
1/3  
[Index]  
[Icon]  
[No.]  
5 [FTP] (p. 9-13)  
[Name]  
[Host Ad-  
dress]  
[File Path]  
[User ID]  
2/3  
[Pass-  
word]  
[anony-  
mous]  
[PASV]  
[Proxy]  
[Port  
Number]  
3/3  
[Index]  
[Icon]  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
9-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.1  
Menu trees in User mode  
9
First level  
Second level  
Third level  
Fourth level  
6 [WebDAV]  
1/3  
[No.]  
[Name]  
[User ID]  
[Pass-  
word]  
2/3  
3/3  
[Host Ad-  
dress]  
[File Path]  
[Proxy]  
[SSL Set-  
tings]  
[Port  
Number]  
[Index]  
[Icon]  
[No.]  
7 [IP Address Fax]  
1/2  
2/2  
[Name]  
[Destina-  
tion]  
[Port  
Number]  
[Destina-  
tion Ma-  
chine  
Type]  
[Index]  
[Icon]  
[No.]  
8 [Internet Fax]  
1/2  
2/2  
[Name]  
[E-Mail  
Address]  
[RX Abili-  
ty (Desti-  
nation)]  
[Index]  
[Icon]  
3 [Group] (p. 9-18) [Name]  
[Select Group]  
[Icon]  
[Check Program Settings]  
4 [E-Mail Settings] 1 [E-Mail Subject] (p. 9-19)  
2 [E-mail Body] (p. 9-19)  
3 [Limiting Access  
to Destinations]  
1 [Apply Lev-  
els/Groups to  
Destinations]  
2 [Group] (p. 9-22)  
3 [Program] (p. 9-23)  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
9-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.1  
Menu trees in User mode  
9
9.1.2  
[User Settings]  
First level  
Second level  
Third level  
Fourth level  
2[CustomDisplay  
Settings]  
2 [Scan/Fax Set-  
1/2  
[Default Tab]  
[Program Default]  
[Address Book Index Default]  
[Shortcut Key 1]  
[Shortcut Key 2]  
2/2  
[Default Address Book]  
[Default Address Type]  
5 [FAX Active  
[TX Display]  
[RX Display]  
8 [Search Option Settings] (p. 9-26)  
4 [Scan/Fax Set-  
1/2  
[JPEG Compression Level]  
[Black Compression Level]  
[TWAIN Lock Time]  
[Default Scan/Fax Settings]  
[Compact PDF/XPS Compression Level]  
[Color TIFF Type]  
2/2  
[Graphic Outlining]  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
9-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
9.1  
Menu trees in User mode  
9
9.1.3  
Mode Memory  
First level  
Second level  
Third level  
Fourth level  
[Page List]  
[Register Pro-  
[Name]  
[Address]  
[URL Notif. Destination]  
[Check Address]  
[Check Program  
[Check Scan Settings]  
[Check Original Settings]  
[Communication Settings]  
[Check E-Mail Settings]  
[Check URL Notif. Destination]  
[Delete] (p. 9-21)  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
9-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
9.2  
One-Touch/User Box Registration  
9
9.2  
One-Touch/User Box Registration  
A maximum of 2,000 destinations can be registered with the address book.  
Reference  
-
If [Registering and Changing Addresses] is set to Restrict in Administrator Settings, register these des-  
tinations using [One-Touch/User Box Registration] in Administrator Settings.  
9.2.1  
Displaying the One-Touch/User Box Registration screen  
To display the One-Touch/User Box Registration screen, press the Utility/Counter key on the control panel  
and then select [One-Touch/User Box Registration] from the Utility menu that appears.  
Reference  
-
An item can also be selected by pressing the key on the keypad for the correspondent number. To se-  
lect [One-Touch/User Box Registration], press 1 on the keypad.  
9.2.2  
Address Book - E-Mail  
E-mail addresses can be registered. To register a new destination, press [New].  
1/2 page  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
9-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
9.2  
One-Touch/User Box Registration  
9
2/2 page  
Item  
Description  
[No.]  
Press [No.], and then enter the registration number of the destination be-  
tween 1 and 2,000. Press [OK] without entering any number to register the  
smallest number available.  
[Name]  
Use the touch panel to enter the name to be registered in the address book  
using up to 24 characters.  
[E-Mail Address]  
[Index]  
Enter the E-mail address of the destination via the touch panel.  
Select the index. For a frequently used destination, specify the index charac-  
ters and select [Favorites] at the same time. This allows you to find it more  
easily.  
[Icon]  
Select an icon.  
The selected icon is used for the image panel function that is available  
when the optional function code "CAA" is enabled.  
Reference  
-
If user authentication settings are configured, press [Me] that appears in the [Address Book] tab to allow  
you to easily send scanned data to your E-mail address (E-mail address in user registration information).  
For details, refer to page 5-20.  
-
-
-
To check a registered destination, select its registered name, and then press [Check Job Set.].  
To change the settings for a registered destination, select its registered name, and then press[Edit].  
To delete a registered destination, select its registered name, and then press [Delete].  
9.2.3  
Address Book - User Box  
Register destinations at which to save documents in a User Box. To register a new destination, press [New].  
To register a destination at which to save documents in a User Box, the User Box must be registered in ad-  
vance. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Box Operations].  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
9-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
9.2  
One-Touch/User Box Registration  
9
Item  
Description  
[No.]  
Press [No.], and then enter the registration number of the destination be-  
tween 1 and 2,000. Press [OK] without entering any number to register the  
smallest number available.  
[Name]  
Use the touch panel to enter the name to be registered in the address book  
using up to 24 characters.  
[User Box]  
[Index]  
Select one User Box you want to save the destination in.  
Select the index. For a frequently used destination, specify the index charac-  
ters and select [Favorites] at the same time. This allows you to find it more  
easily.  
[Icon]  
Select an icon.  
The selected icon is used for the image panel function that is available  
when the optional function code "CAA" is enabled.  
Reference  
-
-
-
To check a registered destination, select its registered name, and then press [Check Job Set.].  
To change the settings for a registered destination, select its registered name, and then press[Edit].  
To delete a registered destination, select its registered name, and then press [Delete].  
9.2.4  
Address Book - Fax  
Register fax destinations. To register a new destination, press [New].  
1/2 page  
2/2 page  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
9-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
9.2  
One-Touch/User Box Registration  
9
Item  
Description  
[No.]  
Press [No.], and then enter the registration number of the des-  
tination between 1 and 2,000. Press [OK] without entering any  
number to register the smallest number available.  
[Name]  
Use the touch panel to enter the name to be registered in the  
address book using up to 24 characters.  
[Fax Number]  
Enter the fax number for the destination using the keypad up  
to 38 digits.  
When the PBX connection is enabled and a call is made  
from the internal line to the outside line, press [Pause] after  
the outside line number such as "0" so that dialing is made  
more surely. [P] is displayed on the screen.  
When the PBX connection is enabled, [Outside] is dis-  
played on the screen. When you select it, an [E-] is dis-  
played.  
If [Confirm Address (Register)] is ON, a screen for entering  
the fax number again appears after you press [OK]. Enter  
the fax number and then press [OK].  
d
Reference  
For details on the Confirm Address function, refer  
to page 10-21.  
[Line Settings]  
Configure the line that is used to send faxes.  
[Overseas TX]  
The transmission rate is set to a lower level when having a poor  
communication.  
[ECM OFF]  
Error Correction Mode (ECM) is cancelled to shorten the trans-  
mission time.  
ECM is an error correction mode defined by ITU-T (Internation-  
al Telecommunication Union - Telecommunication Standardi-  
zation Sector). Fax machines equipped with the ECM feature  
communicate with each other, confirming that the data sent is  
free of errors.  
[V.34 OFF]  
V34 is a communication mode used for super G3 fax commu-  
nication. When the remote machine or this machine is con-  
nected to a telephone line via PBX, however, you may not  
establish a communication in the super G3 mode depending  
on telephone line conditions.  
In this case, it is recommended that you turn V34 off to send  
data. After sending has been completed, this machine auto-  
matically returns to the V34 mode.  
[Check Dest. &  
Send]  
The specified fax number is compared with the remote fax  
number (CSI) and data is sent only when those fax numbers  
match. If they do not match, the communication will fail; there-  
fore preventing a sending error.  
To check the destination and send, the fax number of this  
machine must be registered with the recipient's fax ma-  
chine.  
[Select Line]  
If two fax expansion kits are installed, you can select [Line 1]  
or [Line 2] to send a fax. Specify the line used for sending fax-  
es.  
[Index]  
[Icon]  
Select the index. For a frequently used destination, specify the  
index characters and select [Favorites] at the same time. This  
allows you to find it more easily.  
Select an icon.  
The selected icon is used for the image panel function that  
is available when the optional function code "CAA" is ena-  
bled.  
Reference  
-
-
-
To check a registered destination, select its registered name, and then press [Check Job Set.].  
To change the settings for a registered destination, select its registered name, and then press[Edit].  
To delete a registered destination, select its registered name, and then press [Delete].  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
9-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
9.2  
One-Touch/User Box Registration  
9
9.2.5  
Address Book - PC (SMB)  
Register PC (SMB) destinations. To register a new destination, press [New].  
1/3 page  
2/3 page  
3/3 page  
Item  
Description  
[No.]  
Press [No.], and then enter the registration number of the destination be-  
tween 1 and 2,000. Press [OK] without entering any number to register the  
smallest number available.  
[Name]  
Use the touch panel to enter the name to be registered in the address book  
using up to 24 characters.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
9-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
9.2  
One-Touch/User Box Registration  
9
Item  
Description  
[User ID]  
Enter the user ID for logging into the destination computer via the touch panel  
(up to 127 bytes).  
If user authentication settings have been applied, you can avoid register-  
ing a password on the screen for registering a new PC (SMB) destination  
and enhance security by using the user ID and password included in user  
registration information. If this is the case, leave the User ID and Pass-  
word boxes blank. In addition, set [Scan to Authorized Folder Settings] in  
Administrator Settings to [Limit]. For details on setting this function, refer  
to the [User's Guide Network Administrator].  
[Password]  
Enter the password for logging into the destination computer via the touch  
panel (up to 14 characters).  
[Host Address]  
Enter the host name, IPv4 address or IPv6 address as the host address for  
the destination computer.  
The host name must be less than 255 characters in length.  
If you enter a host name and then select to enter an IP address, the host  
name is cleared.  
If you enter an IP address and then press [Input Host Name], the IP ad-  
dress is cleared.  
Host name and file path must be specified in uppercase.  
To perform SMB transmission using an IPv6 address, set the Direct Host-  
ing to [ON]. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator].  
[File Path]  
Enter the destination file path for saving data via the touch panel (up to 255  
bytes).  
[Reference]  
Allows you to detect a computer on the network and register a shared folder  
as a destination.  
If the number of computers or workgroups on the network (subnet) to  
which this machine is connected exceeds the value shown below, the  
structure of the folders may not be properly reference.  
Workgroups: 512  
Computers: 512  
The structure of the folders cannot be referenced in the IPv6 environment.  
[Index]  
[Icon]  
Select the index. For a frequently used destination, specify the index charac-  
ters and select [Favorites] at the same time. This allows you to find it more  
easily.  
Select an icon.  
The selected icon is used for the image panel function that is available  
when the optional function code "CAA" is enabled.  
Reference  
-
If Active Directory is used for user authentication, press [Home] that appears on the touch panel to allow  
you to easily send scanned data to your own Home folder. For details, refer to page 5-21.  
-
-
-
To check a registered destination, select its registered name, and then press [Check Job Set.].  
To change the settings for a registered destination, select its registered name, and then press[Edit].  
To delete a registered destination, select its registered name, and then press [Delete].  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
9-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
9.2  
One-Touch/User Box Registration  
9
9.2.6  
Address Book - FTP  
Register FTP destinations. To register a new destination, press [New].  
1/3 page  
2/3 page  
3/3 page  
Item  
Description  
[No.]  
Press [No.], and then enter the registration number of the destination be-  
tween 1 and 2,000. Press [OK] without entering any number to register the  
smallest number available.  
[Name]  
Use the touch panel to enter the name to be registered in the address book  
using up to 24 characters.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
9-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
9.2  
One-Touch/User Box Registration  
9
Item  
Description  
[Host Address]  
Enter the host name, IPv4 address or IPv6 address as the host address for  
the destination server.  
The host name must be less than 63 characters in length.  
If you enter a host name and then select to enter an IP address, the host  
name is cleared.  
If you enter the IP address and then press [Input Host Name], the IP ad-  
dress is saved and displayed in the input screen.  
Before entering the host name, check that the DNS settings are correctly  
specified. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator].  
[File Path]  
[User ID]  
Enter the destination file path for saving data via the touch panel (up to 127  
bytes).  
Enter the user ID for logging into the destination computer via the touch panel  
(up to 63 bytes).  
[Password]  
[anonymous]  
Enter the password for logging into the destination computer via the touch  
panel (up to 63 characters).  
If you do not want to specify the user ID for logging in to the host using the  
host name, press [ON].  
[PASV]  
Select whether to use the PASV mode.  
[Proxy]  
Select whether or not a proxy server is used.  
Enter the port number (any number between 1 and 65535).  
[Port Number]  
[Index]  
Select the index. For a frequently used destination, specify the index charac-  
ters and select [Favorites] at the same time. This allows you to find it more  
easily.  
[Icon]  
Select an icon.  
The selected icon is used for the image panel function that is available  
when the optional function code "CAA" is enabled.  
Reference  
-
-
-
To check a registered destination, select its registered name, and then press [Check Job Set.].  
To change the settings for a registered destination, select its registered name, and then press[Edit].  
To delete a registered destination, select its registered name, and then press [Delete].  
9.2.7  
Address Book - WebDAV  
Register WebDAV destinations. To register a new destination, press [New].  
1/3 page  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
9-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
9.2  
One-Touch/User Box Registration  
9
2/3 page  
3/3 page  
Item  
Description  
[No.]  
Press [No.], and then enter the registration number of the destination be-  
tween 1 and 2,000. Press [OK] without entering any number to register the  
smallest number available.  
[Name]  
Use the touch panel to enter the name to be registered in the address book  
using up to 24 characters.  
[User ID]  
Enter the user ID for logging into the destination computer via the touch panel  
(up to 63 bytes).  
[Password]  
[Host Address]  
Enter the password for logging into the destination computer via the touch  
panel (up to 63 characters).  
Enter the host name, IPv4 address or IPv6 address as the host address for  
the destination server.  
The host name must be less than 63 characters in length.  
If you enter a host name and then select to enter an IP address, the host  
name is cleared.  
If you enter the IP address and then press [Input Host Name], the IP ad-  
dress is saved and displayed in the input screen.  
Before entering the host name, check that the DNS settings are correctly  
specified. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator].  
[File Path]  
Enter the destination file path for saving data via the touch panel (up to 142  
bytes).  
[Proxy]  
Select whether or not a proxy server is used.  
Select whether to enable SSL.  
[SSL Settings]  
[Port Number]  
[Index]  
Enter the port number (any number between 1 and 65535).  
Select the index. For a frequently used destination, specify the index charac-  
ters and select [Favorites] at the same time. This allows you to find it more  
easily.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
9-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
9.2  
One-Touch/User Box Registration  
9
Item  
Description  
Select an icon.  
[Icon]  
The selected icon is used for the image panel function that is available  
when the optional function code "CAA" is enabled.  
Reference  
-
-
-
To check a registered destination, select its registered name, and then press [Check Job Set.].  
To change the settings for a registered destination, select its registered name, and then press[Edit].  
To delete a registered destination, select its registered name, and then press [Delete].  
9.2.8  
Address Book - IP Address Fax  
Register IP address fax destinations. To register a new destination, press [New].  
1/2 page  
2/2 page  
Item  
Description  
[No.]  
Press [No.], and then enter the registration number of the destination be-  
tween 1 and 2,000. Press [OK] without entering any number to register the  
smallest number available.  
[Name]  
Use the touch panel to enter the name to be registered in the address book  
using up to 24 characters.  
[Destination]  
Enter the host name, IPv4 address, IPv6 address or E-mail address as the  
host address for the destination device.  
The host name or E-mail address must be less than 317 characters in length.  
If you enter a host name and then select to enter an IP address, the host  
name is cleared.  
Before entering the host name or E-mail address, check that the DNS set-  
tings are correctly specified. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Net-  
work Administrator].  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
9-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
9.2  
One-Touch/User Box Registration  
9
Item  
Description  
[Port Number]  
Enter the port number (any number between 1 and 65535).  
[Destination Machine  
Type]  
Select [Color] or [Monochrome] depending on the recipient's machine type.  
[Index]  
Select the index. For a frequently used destination, specify the index charac-  
ters and select [Favorites] at the same time. This allows you to find it more  
easily.  
[Icon]  
Select an icon.  
The selected icon is used for the image panel function that is available  
when the optional function code "CAA" is enabled.  
Reference  
-
-
-
To check a registered destination, select its registered name, and then press [Check Job Set.].  
To change the settings for a registered destination, select its registered name, and then press[Edit].  
To delete a registered destination, select its registered name, and then press [Delete].  
9.2.9  
Address Book - Internet Fax  
Register Internet fax addresses. To register a new destination, press [New].  
1/2 page  
2/2 page  
Item  
Description  
[No.]  
Press [No.], and then enter the registration number of the destination be-  
tween 1 and 2,000. Press [OK] without entering any number to register the  
smallest number available.  
[Name]  
Use the touch panel to enter the name to be registered in the address book  
using up to 24 characters.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
9-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
9.2  
One-Touch/User Box Registration  
9
Item  
Description  
[E-Mail Address]  
[RX Ability (Destination)]  
Enter the E-mail address of the destination via the touch panel.  
Select the items for which the recipient machine can receive for compression  
type, paper size and resolution.  
[Index]  
[Icon]  
Select the index. For a frequently used destination, specify the index charac-  
ters and select [Favorites] at the same time. This allows you to find it more  
easily.  
Select an icon.  
The selected icon is used for the image panel function that is available  
when the optional function code "CAA" is enabled.  
Reference  
-
-
-
To check a registered destination, select its registered name, and then press [Check Job Set.].  
To change the settings for a registered destination, select its registered name, and then press[Edit].  
To delete a registered destination, select its registered name, and then press [Delete].  
9.2.10 Registering groups  
You can register one or more destinations as a group.  
Up to 100 groups (00-99) can be registered for Fax/Scan function.  
Up to 500 one-touch destinations can be registered in one group destination.  
To register a group, press [New].  
Item  
Description  
[Name]  
Use the touch panel to enter the name to be registered in the address book  
using up to 24 characters.  
[Select Group]  
[Icon]  
Select a destination type, and then select the destination to be registered in  
a group.  
Select an icon.  
The selected icon is used for the image panel function that is available  
when the optional function code "CAA" is enabled.  
[Check Program Set-  
tings]  
Allows you to view a list of one-touch destinations registered in a group.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
9-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
9.2  
One-Touch/User Box Registration  
9
9.2.11 Registering E-mail setting subjects (E-mail/I-FAX)  
Up to 10 E-mail subjects and Internet fax subjects (Subject) can be registered. A desired text string can be  
selected from those registered when sending. To register a new subject, press [New].  
Item  
Description  
[Subject]  
Enter a subject using up to 64 characters.  
Reference  
-
-
-
-
To check a registered subject, select it, and then press [Check Job Set.].  
To change the settings for a registered subject, select the subject to be changed, and then press [Edit].  
To delete a registered subject, select the subject to be deleted, and then press [Delete].  
To set a subject as the default, select the subject, and then press [Set as Default].  
9.2.12 Registering an E-mail setting text (E-mail/I-FAX)  
Up to 10 E-mail and Internet fax text strings (Subject) can be registered. A desired text string can be selected  
from those registered when sending. To register a new text string, press [New].  
Item  
Description  
[Body]  
Enter a body message using up to 256 characters.  
Reference  
-
-
-
-
To check a registered text string, select the string, and then press [Check Job Set.].  
To change the settings for a registered text string, select the string, and then press [Edit].  
To delete a registered text string, select the text string, and then press [Delete].  
To set a text string as the default, select the string, and then press [Set as Default].  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
9-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
9.2  
One-Touch/User Box Registration  
9
9.2.13 Registering a scan/fax program  
You can register destinations to which faxes are frequently sent as programs together with Scan, Original,  
and Communication Settings. If these are registered as programs, you can call a registered set of the desti-  
nation and its Scan, Original, and Communication Setting by simply pressing the Mode Memory key.  
Reference  
-
-
Up to 400 normal programs and up to 10 [Temporary One-Touch] can be registered as programs.  
If 410 programs have been already registered, delete unnecessary programs before registering new  
ones.  
Registering programs  
1
Press the Fax/Scan key on the control panel and then configure Scan Settings, Original Settings and  
Communication Settings for which you want to register them as a program.  
2
3
Press the Mode Memory key.  
Select an unregistered program button, and then press [Register Program].  
The Register Scan/Fax Program screen appears.  
Item  
[Name]  
Description  
Use the touch panel to enter the program name using up to 24 characters.  
[Address]  
Allows you to select one destination. Select a destination from Address Book  
or enter it directly.  
If [Confirm Address (Register)] is ON, a screen for entering a fax number  
again appears after you specify a fax destination in the [Direct Input] tab  
and press [OK]. Enter the fax number and then press [OK].  
For details on the Confirm Address function, refer to page 10-21.  
[URL Notif. Destination]  
Allows you to specify the destination to be notified by E-mail when a User  
Box in the main unit, FTP, SMB or WebDAV job has finished. Select a desti-  
nation from Address Book or enter it directly.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
9-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
9.2  
One-Touch/User Box Registration  
9
Check Program Settings  
Press this key to check the contents of a registered program. After checking them, press [Close].  
Item  
Description  
[Check Address]  
[Check Scan Settings]  
[Check Original Settings]  
Allows you to check the specified address.  
Allows you to check the scan settings configured for the program.  
Allows you to check the original settings configured for the program.  
[Communication Set-  
tings]  
Allows you to check the communication settings configured for the program.  
[Check E-Mail Settings]  
Allows you to check the E-Mail settings configured for the program.  
[Check URL Notif. Desti-  
nation]  
Allows you to check the URL notification settings configured for the program.  
[RX Ability (Destination)]  
Allows you to check the reception capability of the recipient configured for  
the program.  
Delete  
Press to delete a registered program. To delete, press [Delete].  
9.2.14 Create User Box - Confidential User Box (G3)  
To create a User Box for confidential reception, configure the Confidential RX settings when creating a Public  
or Personal User Box.  
d
Reference  
For details, refer to the [User's Guide Box Operations].  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
9-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
9.2  
One-Touch/User Box Registration  
9
9.2.15 Create User Box - Bulletin Board User Box (G3)  
d
Reference  
For details on creating Bulletin Board User Boxes, refer to the [User's Guide Box Operations].  
9.2.16 Create User Box - Relay User Box (G3)  
d
Reference  
For details on creating the Relay User Box, refer to the [User's Guide Box Operations].  
9.2.17 Limiting Access to Destinations - Apply Levels/Groups to Destinations  
Apply a reference permission level to a destination. Log in as a user with the level that you want to apply, and  
then change the level of the destination.  
Reference  
-
-
-
The initial level for a newly created destination is "0".  
You cannot apply a group or a level higher than the level of the user you are logged in with.  
To apply a group, you must register in Administrator Settings the destinations to be added to the group  
in advance. For details on the reference allowed groups, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations].  
Address Book  
Select a destination whose level you want to change, and then press [Apply Group] or [Apply Level] to specify  
the level.  
Group  
Select a destination whose level you want to change, and then press [Apply Group] or [Apply Level] to specify  
the level.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
9-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
9.2  
One-Touch/User Box Registration  
9
Program  
Select a destination whose level you want to change, and then press [Apply Group] or [Apply Level] to specify  
the level.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
9-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
9.3  
User Settings  
9
9.3  
User Settings  
9.3.1  
Displaying the User Settings screen  
To display the User Settings screen, press the Utility/Counter key on the control panel, and then select [User  
Settings] from the Utility menu that appears.  
Reference  
-
An item can also be selected by pressing the key on the keypad for the correspondent number. To se-  
lect [User Settings], press 2 on the keypad.  
9.3.2  
Custom Display Settings - Scan/Fax Settings  
Customize the Fax/Scan mode screen.  
Configure the default tab of Fax/Scan mode screen the (Default: Address Book).  
1/2 page  
Item  
Description  
[Default Tab]  
Configure the default tab of Fax/Scan mode screen the (Default: Address  
Book).  
[Program Default]  
Configure the default Scan/Fax program screen (Default: PAGE1).  
[Address Book Index De- Select a index type that appears in the [Address Book] tab (Default: Fa-  
fault]  
vorites).  
[Shortcut Key 1]/[Short-  
cut Key 2]  
Allows you to register up to two shortcut keys for scan, original, or commu-  
nication settings at the bottom of the screen.  
Two shortcut keys can be registered. If an optional Image Controller IC-  
412 v1.1 is installed, only one shortcut key can be registered.  
To delete the shortcut key, press [OFF].  
If Shortcut Keys 1 and 2 are configured, [Language Selection] is not dis-  
played on the Scan/Fax screen.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
9-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
9.3  
User Settings  
9
2/2 page  
Item  
Description  
[Default Address Book]  
Select Index or Address Type as the way the registered destinations are dis-  
played.  
[Default Address Type]  
When you set [Default Address Book] to [Address Type], select an address  
type that is displayed as the default in the [Address Book] tab  
9.3.3  
Custom Display Settings - Fax Active Screen (G3/IP/I-FAX)  
Customize the Fax Active screen.  
Item  
Description  
[TX Display]  
Specify whether to display a message indicating data being sent (Default:  
No).  
[RX Display]  
Specify whether to display a message indicating data being received (De-  
fault: No).  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
9-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
9.3  
User Settings  
9
9.3.4  
Custom Display Settings - Search Option Settings  
Configure the contents of the search option screen when performing an detail search for registered destina-  
tions.  
(E-mail/Box/SMB/FTP/WebDAV/G3/IP/I-FAX)  
Item  
Description  
[Uppercase and Lower-  
case Letters]  
Select whether to differentiate uppercase and lowercase letters when per-  
forming a search.  
[Search Option Screen]  
Select whether to display the search option screen when performing a detail  
search. When you select [ON], the search option screen appears.  
9.3.5  
Scan/Fax Settings  
1/2 page  
Item  
Description  
[JPEG Compression  
Level] (E-  
mail/Box/SMB/FTP/  
WebDAV/Web Serv-  
ice/IP)  
Specify the compression level for saving images in full color.  
[High Quality]: Provides higher quality images, but the data size becomes  
larger.  
[Standard] (default): Provides images of data size and quality of a mid-lev-  
el between [High Quality] and [High Compression].  
[High Compression]: Provides lower quality images, but the data size be-  
comes smaller.  
[Black Compression Lev- Specify the capability of the encoding method for sending binary (black and  
el]  
white) images.  
[MH]: The data size is larger.  
[MMR] (default): The data size is smaller.  
Data saved in MMR format may not be opened on your computer de-  
pending on the application.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
9-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
9.3  
User Settings  
Item  
9
Description  
[TWAIN Lock Time]  
Specify the length of time until the machine operations are unlocked during  
scanning (excluding push scanning). (Default: 120 sec.)  
To use the machine as a scanner from an application using TWAIN, install  
the KONICA MINOLTA TWAIN driver software designed for that pur-  
pose. For details, refer to the TWAIN driver manual in the bizhub  
C360/C280/C220 series CD.  
This function is not available if the optional Image Controller IC-412 v1.1  
is installed.  
[Default Scan/Fax Set-  
tings]  
Configure the default settings (settings selected when Reset is pressed) for  
the Fax/Scan mode screen.  
2/2 page  
Item  
Description  
[Compact PDF/XPS  
Compression Level] (E-  
mail/Box/SMB/  
Specify the compression level for saving data in the compact PDF or XPS for-  
mat.  
[High Quality]: Provides higher quality images, but the data size becomes  
larger.  
[Standard] (default): Provides images of data size and quality of a mid-lev-  
el between [High Quality] and [High Compression].  
[High Compression]: Provides lower quality images, but the data size be-  
comes smaller.  
FTP/WebDAV)  
[Color TIFF Type] (E-  
mail/Box/SMB/  
FTP/WebDAV)  
Select the compression level used for saving TIFF format data in color. If you  
cannot open data saved with [TIFF(modified TAG)] selected, change your se-  
lection to [TIFF(TTN2)] (default).  
[Graphic Outlining](E-  
mail/Box/SMB/  
FTP/WebDAV)  
This function enables you to specify the accuracy of outline processing when  
creating an outline PDF.  
Scanned document data is separated into text and image, and image is sub-  
jected to outline processing. Specify the level of outline processing from  
[OFF] to [HIGH].  
The outlining level becomes higher in the order of [LOW], [MIDDLE], and  
[HIGH].  
If [OFF] is specified, the image will not be outlined.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
9-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10.1  
Configuration before use  
10  
10 Administrator Mode Settings  
Configure Fax/Scan settings in the Administrator mode.  
10.1  
Configuration before use  
10.1.1 E-mail  
Before using E-mail transmission or Internet Fax, configure the following items. This section introduces basic  
items. Also refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator] for details.  
-
-
-
The E-mail address of the administrator  
TCP/IP Setting  
E-Mail TX (SMTP)  
d
Reference  
For details, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator].  
10.1.2 User Box  
Before saving data in User Boxes, configure the following items. For details on saving data in a User Box,  
refer to the [User's Guide Box Operations].  
-
Create User Box  
d
Reference  
For details on the procedure for configuring settings for it, refer to the [User's Guide Box Operations].  
10.1.3 SMB  
Before using SMB transmission, configure the following items. This section introduces basic items. Also refer  
to the [User's Guide Network Administrator] for details.  
-
-
TCP/IP Setting  
SMB Client Setting  
d
Reference  
For details, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator].  
10.1.4 FTP  
Before using FTP transmission, configure the following items. This section introduces basic items. Also refer  
to the [User's Guide Network Administrator] for details.  
-
-
TCP/IP Setting  
FTP Setting  
d
Reference  
For details, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator].  
10.1.5 G3 Fax  
Before using G3 Fax, configure the following items.  
-
-
Header Information  
Line Parameter Setting  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
10-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
10.1  
Configuration before use  
10  
10.1.6 Internet Fax  
Before using Internet Fax, configure the following items.  
-
-
-
-
-
-
Network Fax Function Settings  
Header Information  
Machine E-Mail Address  
For details on the configuration procedure, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations].  
Machine Setting  
For details on the configuration procedure, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations].  
TCP/IP Setting  
E-Mail Setting  
d
Reference  
For details on Network Fax Function Settings, TCP/IP Settings and E-mail Settings, refer to the [User's Guide  
Network Administrator].  
10.1.7 IP Address Fax  
Before using IP Address Fax, configure the following items.  
-
-
-
-
Network Fax Function Settings  
Header Information  
TCP/IP Setting  
SMTP transmission and reception settings  
d
Reference  
For details on Network Fax Function Settings, TCP/IP Settings, and SMTP transmission and reception set-  
tings, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator].  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
10-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
10.2  
Menu tree in Administrator mode  
10  
10.2  
Menu tree in Administrator mode  
The following settings can be configured in Administrator Settings. The menu tree contains the items that re-  
late to Network Scan, G3 Fax and Network Fax.  
10.2.1 [System Settings]  
First level  
Second level  
Third level  
Fourth level  
1/2  
1 [Power  
Save Set-  
tings]  
[Enter Power Save Mode] (p. 10-13)  
2 [Output  
Settings]  
1 [Print/Fax Out-  
put Settings]  
6 [Re-  
strictUser  
Access]  
3 [Restrict Access  
to Job Settings]  
1/2  
[Registering and Changing Ad-  
dresses]  
[Change the "From" Address]  
4 [Restrict Opera-  
[Restrict Broadcasting]  
9 [Reset  
Settings]  
3 [Job Reset]  
[Next Job]  
[Reset Data After  
Job] (p. 10-9)  
2/2  
2 [Stamp  
Settings]  
1 [Header/Footer Settings] (p. 10-10)  
2 [Fax TX Settings] (p. 10-14)  
9 [Ad-  
[Original Direction Confirmation Screen] (p. 10-11)  
vanced  
Preview  
Setting]  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
10-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
10.2  
Menu tree in Administrator mode  
10  
10.2.2 [Fax Settings]  
First level  
Second level  
[Sender]  
Third level  
Fourth level  
1 [Header Infor-  
mation] (p. 10-14)  
[Sender Fax No.]  
[Header Position]  
2 [Header/Footer  
Position]  
[Print Receiver's Name](Not displayed for North American or  
Hong Kong models. )  
[Footer Position]  
3 [Line Parameter  
Setting] (p. 10-17)  
1/3  
[Dialing Method]  
[Receive Mode]  
[Number of RX Call Rings]  
[Number of Redials]  
[Redial Interval]  
2/3  
3/3  
1/3  
[Line Monitor Sound]  
[Line Monitor Sound Vol.]  
[Duplex Print (RX)]  
4 [TX/RX Settings]  
[Letter/Ledger over A4/A3]  
[Print Paper Selection]  
[Print Paper Size]  
[Incorrect User Box No. Entry]  
[Tray Selection for RX Print]  
[Min. Reduction for RX Print]  
[Print Separate Fax Pages]  
[File After Polling TX]  
[No. of Sets (RX)]  
2/3  
3/3  
*1  
[Individual Receiving Line Setup]  
*1  
[Individual Sender Line Setup]  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
10-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
10.2  
Menu tree in Administrator mode  
First level  
10  
Second level  
Third level  
Fourth level  
5 [Function Set-  
tings]  
1 [Function  
ON/OFF Setting]  
1/2  
[F-Code TX]  
[Relay RX]  
[Relay Printing]  
[Destination Check Display  
Function]  
2/2  
[Confirm Address (TX)]  
[Confirm Address (Register)]  
3 [Memory RX Setting] (p. 10-22)  
*2  
*2  
5 [Forward TX  
[Fax Line 1]  
[Fax Line 2]  
7 [Incomplete TX Hold] (p. 10-24)  
*2  
*2  
*1  
8 [PC-Fax RX Set- [Fax Line 1]  
[Fax Line 2]  
9 [TSI User Box  
[Fax Line 1]  
[Action when TSI  
User Box is not  
set.]  
[Print]  
[TSI User Box  
Registration]  
*1  
[Fax Line 2]  
[Action when TSI  
User Box is not  
set.]  
[Print]  
[TSI User Box  
Registration]  
6 [PBX Connection Setting] (p. 10-26)  
7 [Report Set-  
1/3  
2/3  
3/3  
[Activity Report]  
[TX Result Report]  
[Sequential TX Report]  
[Timer Reservation TX Report]  
[Confidential Rx Report]  
[Bulletin TX Report]  
[Relay TX Result Report]  
[Relay Request Report]  
[PC-Fax TX Error Report]  
[Broadcast Result Report]  
[TX Result Report Check]  
[Network Fax RX Error Report] (p. 10-35)  
[MDN Message] (p. 10-35)  
[Print E-mail Message Body] (p. 10-36)  
8 [Job Settings List] (p. 10-29)  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
10-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10.2  
Menu tree in Administrator mode  
First level  
10  
Second level  
Third level  
Fourth level  
9 [Multi Line Set-  
1 [Line Parameter  
[Dialing Method]  
[Number of RX Call Rings]  
[Line Monitor Sound]  
[PC-FAX TX Setting]  
2 [Function Set-  
3 [Multi Line Settings] (p. 10-30)  
0 [Network Fax  
Settings]  
1 [Black Compression Level] (p. 10-37)  
2 [Color/Grayscale Multi-Value Compression Method]  
4 [Internet Fax Self RX Ability] (p. 10-38)  
5 [Internet Fax Advanced Settings] (p. 10-39)  
6 [IP Address Fax Operation Settings] (page 10-40)  
Reference  
*1  
-
-
The item with " " mark is displayed if two units of the Fax Kit FK-502 are installed.  
*2  
The item with " " mark is displayed if two units of the Fax Kit FK-502 are installed, and [Individual Re-  
ceiving Line Setup] is set to [ON] in Administrator Settings. For details on [Individual Receiving Line Set-  
up], refer to page 10-19.  
10.2.3 [Security Settings]  
First level  
Second level  
4 [Security De-  
1/4  
2/4  
[Manual Destination Input]  
[Restrict Fax TX]  
[Hide Personal Information]  
[Display Activity Log]  
[Initialize]  
3/4  
[Job History Thumbnail Display]  
[Copy Guard]  
[Password Copy]  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
10-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
10.3  
Administrator Settings (E-mail/Box/SMB/FTP/WebDAV)  
10  
10.3  
Administrator Settings (E-mail/Box/SMB/FTP/WebDAV)  
This section describes administrator settings that are configured for E-mail Transmission, Save in User Box,  
SMB, FTP and WebDAV.  
10.3.1 Displaying the Administrator Settings screen  
To display the Administrator Settings screen, press the Utility/Counter key on the control panel and then  
select [Administrator Settings] from the Utility menu that appears. Enter the administrator password, and then  
press [OK].  
10.3.2 System Settings - Restrict User Access  
Specify items for which access is restricted in the User mode.  
Restrict Access to Job Settings  
1/2 page  
Item  
Description  
[Registering and Chang-  
ing Addresses]  
Specify whether to allow the users to register and change addresses.  
[Change the "From" Ad-  
dress] (E-mail)  
Specify the settings for changing the From address.  
[Allow]: Allows the user to change the From address.  
[Administrator E-Mail Address]: The administrator's E-mail address is set  
to the From address.  
[Login User Address]: The user's E-mail address is set to the From ad-  
dress. If the user's E-mail address is not specified, the administrator's ad-  
dress is set. When User Authentication is enabled, the setting is  
automatically changed from [Allow] to [Login User Address].  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
10-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
10.3  
Administrator Settings (E-mail/Box/SMB/FTP/WebDAV)  
10  
Restrict Operation  
Item  
Description  
[Restrict Broadcasting]  
Specify whether to allow the users to specify destinations to which to send  
broadcast faxes.  
10.3.3 System Settings - Reset Setting - Job Reset - Next Job - Reset Data After  
Job  
Specify whether to reset settings (such as scan setting) configured for sending faxes after sending jobs.  
-
-
-
[Reset All]: Resets all settings.  
[Reset Destination Only]: Resets only the destination settings.  
[Confirm with User]: Displays a message to confirm that you want to clear the settings.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
10-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
10.3  
Administrator Settings (E-mail/Box/SMB/FTP/WebDAV)  
10  
10.3.4 System Settings - Stamp Settings - Header/Footer Settings  
Configure the settings for the header/footer to be inserted on all pages. You can use the settings for the head-  
er/footer configured here for faxing, scanning and printing.  
In the Header/Footer Setting window, press [New]. This brings up a screen that allows you to enter a new  
header/footer.  
Item  
Description  
[Name]  
Use the touch panel to enter the name to be registered in the  
header/footer using up to 16 characters.  
[Header Settings, Footer Settings]  
Specify whether to print the header and footer. Pressing  
[Print] allows you to specify whether to print text, the  
date/time or other information (distribution control number,  
job number or serial number).  
[Text]  
Specify a header or footer string via the control panel.  
Specify the date/time for the header/footer.  
[Date/Time]  
[Other]  
Specify the details of the distribution control number, job  
number, or serial number of the header or footer.  
The serial number is that attached to the machine. For de-  
tails on settings, contact your service representative.  
[Pages]  
Select whether to print the date and time on all pages or the  
first page only.  
[Text Details]  
[Text Color]  
Select the printing color from black, red, blue, green, yellow,  
cyan, or magenta.  
[Text Size]  
[Text Type]  
Select the size (8 pt/10 pt/12 pt/14 pt) in which text is printed.  
Select the font type from Times Roman or Helvetica.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
10-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
10.3  
Administrator Settings (E-mail/Box/SMB/FTP/WebDAV)  
10  
10.3.5 System Settings - Advanced Preview Setting Original direction setting dis-  
play  
When sending a fax using the advanced preview, specify whether to display the screen for selecting the di-  
rection of the original after pressing Proof Copy.  
10.3.6 Security Settings - Security Details  
1/4 page  
Item  
Description  
[Manual Destination Input]  
Specify whether to allow manual destination input.  
If necessary, you can allow manual destination input only for  
G3 fax and restrict it in other transmission options.  
[Allow All] : Allows manual destination input in all trans-  
mission options.  
[Enable Functions Individually] : Allows manual destina-  
tion input only for G3 fax and restricts it in other transmis-  
sion options. (This machine does not support SIP fax.)  
[Restrict] : Hides the [Direct Input] tab to prevent you from  
directly entering destinations.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
10-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
10.3  
Administrator Settings (E-mail/Box/SMB/FTP/WebDAV)  
10  
2/4 page  
Item  
Description  
[Hide Personal Information]  
Specify whether to include destinations in Job History on the  
Job List screen.  
If [ON] is selected, destinations are not displayed.  
[Display Activity Log]  
Specify whether to display fax transmission and reception  
history. If [OFF] is selected, the history is not displayed.  
3/4 page  
Item  
Description  
[Initialize]  
Allows you to select an object of which the data you want to  
clear.  
When you select an object and then press [OK], a dialog box  
appears that confirms you want to clear it.  
Select [Yes], and then press [OK] to clear the data.  
[Job History Thumbnail Display]  
[Copy Guard]  
Specify whether to display the first page for each job in the  
left-side pane when a job history is selected with [Job Histo-  
ry] on each tab that is displayed when [Job List] - [Job De-  
tails] are selected.  
Specify whether to create and detect originals with copy  
guard patterns embedded.  
This item is available when the optional Security Kit SC-  
507 is installed.  
[Password Copy]  
Specify whether to create and detect originals with a pass-  
word embedded.  
This item is available when the optional Security Kit SC-  
507 is installed.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
10-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10.4  
Administrator Settings (G3)  
10  
10.4  
Administrator Settings (G3)  
This section describes administrator settings that are configured for G3 Fax TX. The descriptions in this sec-  
tion also apply to Network Fax.  
10.4.1 System Settings - Power Save Settings - Enter Power Save Mode  
Select the condition on which the machine shifts to the power save mode.  
-
[Normal]: When a fax is received during the power save mode, the fax job is printed. After a predeter-  
mined time has elapsed, the machine shifts to the power save mode.  
-
[Immediately] (default): When a fax is received during the power save mode, the fax job is printed and  
then the machine immediately shifts to the power save mode.  
10.4.2 System Settings - Output Settings - Print/Fax Output Settings - Fax  
Specify the printing method for RX documents.  
-
-
[Batch Print] (default): Printing is started after all documents are received.  
[Page Print]: Printing is made each time a page of document is received.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
10-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
10.4  
Administrator Settings (G3)  
10  
10.4.3 System Settings - Restrict User Access  
Restrict Access to Job Settings - Registering and Changing Addresses  
d
Reference  
For the setting procedure, refer to page 10-8.  
Restrict Operation - Restrict Broadcasting  
d
Reference  
For the setting procedure, refer to page 10-9.  
10.4.4 System Settings - Stamp Settings - Fax TX Settings  
Specify whether to reset stamp settings configured for scanning faxes when sending faxes.  
-
-
[Cancel]: Each page of the faxes is sent with no stamp settings applied.  
[Do Not Cancel]: Each page of the faxes is sent with stamp settings applied.  
10.4.5 System Settings - Advanced Preview Setting Original direction setting dis-  
play  
d
Reference  
For the setting procedure, refer to page 10-11.  
10.4.6 Fax Settings - Header Information  
Register sender information and fax ID that are included in TX documents that is to be printed on documents  
received by the recipient.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
10-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
10.4  
Administrator Settings (G3)  
10  
Item  
Description  
[Sender]  
Allows you to register more than one sender name that is to be printed on  
documents received by the recipient as sender information. Enter a text us-  
ing up to 30 characters.  
To register a new sender, press [New].  
Possible to specify up to 20 types of views for senders.  
To change the settings for a registered sender, select the sender and then  
press[Edit]. In the Edit screen, registered numbers cannot be changed.  
To delete a registered sender, select the sender to be deleted and then  
press [Delete].  
To specify a sender as the default, select the sender and then press [Set  
as Default].  
If two units of the Fax Kit FK-502 are installed, and [Individual Sender  
Line Setup] is set to [ON] in Administrator Settings, default value can be  
specified for each line. Select the sender to specify as the default, and  
then press either [Set Line1 as Default] or [Set Line2 as Default]. For de-  
tails on [Individual Sender Line Setup], refer to page 10-19. To specify the  
fax ID of an extension line, refer to page 10-31.  
[Sender Fax No.]  
The registered fax number is printed as the sender's information on the doc-  
ument received by the recipient. Enter a sender fax number using 0-9, *, #,  
[+], and space (up to 20 characters).  
If two units of the Fax Kit FK-502 are installed, register the sender fax  
number for each of the two lines. To specify the fax ID of an extension  
10.4.7 Fax Settings - Header/Footer Position  
Specify the position on a page where sender information and fax ID that are printed on received documents.  
Item  
Description  
[Header Position]  
Specify the position of the sender information to be added on a fax document  
sent from this machine. The added sender information is printed as a part of  
the image on the document received by the recipient. If you select [OFF], the  
sender information will not be added.  
[Print Receiver's Name]  
[Footer Position]  
Specify the items to be added as the sender information. (Not displayed for  
North American or Hong Kong models. )  
Specify the position of the reception information (reception time and recep-  
tion number) to be printed on a document received by this machine. If you  
select [OFF], the reception information will not be printed.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
10-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
10.4  
Administrator Settings (G3)  
10  
The following indicates where to print sender information or reception information.  
-
-
-
[Inside Body Text]: The sender or receiving information is added so that it is overlaid on part of the orig-  
inal image before the fax is being sent.  
From : MFP01  
To:123456789 05/25/2006 13:22 #138 P.001/001  
[Outside Body Text]: The sender or receiving information is added to the outside of the original image  
area before the fax is being sent.  
From : MFP01  
To:123456789 05/25/2006 13:22 #138 P.001/001  
[OFF]: The sender or receiving information is not added.  
The following indicate how sender information is printed.  
-
[ON]: The sender name, destination fax number (To: xxxxx), transmission start date and time, transmis-  
sion number, and the number of pages are added as sender information. (Not displayed for North Amer-  
ican or Hong Kong models. )  
From : MFP01  
To:123456789 05/25/2006 13:22 #138 P.001/001  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
10-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10.4  
Administrator Settings (G3)  
10  
-
[OFF]: The sender name, fax ID of this machine, transmission start date and time, transmission number,  
and the number of pages are added as sender information.  
From : MFP01  
987654321  
05/25/2006 13:22 #138 P.001/001  
10.4.8 Fax Settings - Line Parameter Setting  
Configure items related to fax transmission and reception.  
1/3 page  
Item  
Description  
[Dialing Method]  
[Receive Mode]  
Select one of the dialing methods from PB/10pps/20pps.  
Select a receive mode.  
[Auto RX]: Automatically receives faxes.  
[Manual RX]: If you expect frequent phone calls, for example if an external  
telephone is connected to this machine, set this mode to Manual RX.  
d
Reference  
For details on Auto RX, refer to page 6-2.  
For details on Manual RX, refer to page 6-3.  
[Number of RX Call  
Rings]  
Set the number of incoming call rings in the range between 0 and 15 (Default:  
2).  
[Number of Redials]  
Set the number of redials (for busy, no-answer, and so on). (The setting range  
varies depending on the local standard. )  
[Redial Interval]  
Set redial intervals in the range between 1 and 15 minutes (Default: 3 min-  
utes).  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
10-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
10.4  
Administrator Settings (G3)  
10  
2/3 page  
Item  
Description  
[Line Monitor Sound]  
Set this item to ON to hear the line sound from a speaker during communi-  
cation.  
3/3 page  
Item  
Description  
[Line Monitor Sound Vol.] Set the volume level of the speaker in the range between 0 and 31 (Default:  
16).  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
10-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
10.4  
Administrator Settings (G3)  
10  
10.4.9 Fax Settings - TX/RX Setting  
Configure the handling of files for polling TX operations and printing method for RX operations.  
1/3 page  
Item  
Description  
[Duplex Print (RX)]  
If Duplex Print (RX) is set to ON, the original received is printed on both sides  
of the paper.  
If [Print Separate Fax Pages] is set to ON, this key does not appear.  
[Letter/Ledger over  
A4/A3]  
Specify ON to select letter or ledger paper for printing received documents  
priory to other paper size.  
[Print Paper Selection]  
[Auto Select]: Print paper is automatically selected.  
[Fixed Size]: Paper of the specified size is used for printing.  
[Priority Size]: Paper of the size specified as the preferred size is used for  
printing. If no preferred size is specified, paper of the closest size is used  
for printing.  
[Print Paper Size]  
Specify paper size for printing received documents. The initial setting varies  
depending on the setting for [Letter/Ledger over A4/A3].  
d
Reference  
To enable the setting for the print paper size, set [Tray Selection  
for RX Print] to [Auto].  
[Incorrect User Box No.  
Entry]  
Configure how the machine should react where an unregistered User Box  
number is specified for fax RX using a User Box.  
[Print]: Prints received documents.  
[Show Error Message]:Handles the fax as a communications error.  
[Auto Create User Box]: Automatically creates a User Box with a specified  
number and stores documents.  
If [Password Rules] is set to ON, this item is not available.  
2/3 page  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
10-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
10.4  
Administrator Settings (G3)  
Item  
10  
Description  
[Tray Selection for RX  
Print]  
If you want to fix the paper tray used to print received faxes, select the paper  
tray.  
The available tray types vary depending on the options that are installed.  
[Min. Reduction for RX  
Print]  
Specify the reduction ratio for received document to Full Size or a value be-  
tween 87 and 96%.  
If the reduction ratio for printing is set to [Full Size], [Print Paper Selection]  
and [Tray Selection for RX Print] are set to [Auto]. Or [Print Separate Fax  
Pages] is set to [OFF].  
[Print Separate Fax Pag-  
es]  
If this item is set to ON, a document longer than the standard size is printed  
on separate pages.  
[Print Separate Fax Pages] does not appear if [Duplex Print (RX)] is set to  
ON.  
[File After Polling TX]  
3/3 page  
Specify whether to delete the original after completing polling TX.  
3/3 page (If two units of the Fax Kit FK-502 are installed)  
Item  
Description  
[No. of Sets (RX)]  
Set the number of copies for received documents to any number from 1 to  
10 (Default: 1 set.).  
[Individual Receiving  
Line Setup]  
Specify whether to configure the RX setting for each line.  
Displays if 2 units of the Fax Kit FK-502 are installed.  
[Individual Sender Line  
Setup]  
Specify whether to configure the sender setting for each line.  
Displays if 2 units of the Fax Kit FK-502 are installed.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
10-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
10.4  
Administrator Settings (G3)  
10  
10.4.10 Fax Settings - Function Settings  
Function ON/OFF Settings  
1/2 page  
Item  
Description  
[F-Code TX]  
Specify whether to use F-Code TX.  
F-Code TX provides two methods: confidential transmission and relay  
transmission.  
d
Reference  
For details on confidential transmission, refer to page 7-5.  
For details on relay transmission, refer to page 7-6.  
[Relay RX]  
Set this item to ON to enable the machine to send received documents as a  
relay distribution station to relaying destinations. To use the relay distribution  
function, you must register a Relay User Box.  
d
Reference  
For details on registering the Relay User Box, refer to the [User's  
Guide Box Operations].  
[Relay Printing]  
Specify whether to print documents received from a relay instruction station.  
[Destination Check Dis-  
play Function]  
Specify whether to display the list of the specified destinations when sending  
a fax.  
2/2 page  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
10-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
10.4  
Administrator Settings (G3)  
Item  
10  
Description  
[Confirm Address (TX)]  
(G3)  
When specifying a fax destination with direct input, a screen appears  
prompting you to enter the fax number again for confirmation. Entering the  
fax number twice prevents one from entering incorrect destinations.  
When Confirm Address (TX) is enabled, you cannot specify a destination  
using [Off-Hook]. You cannot specify the fax address using [Job History]  
either.  
[Confirm Address (Regis- When the user specify a fax destination when the user registers a program,  
ter)] (G3)  
configures the fax forwarding settings, or registers a one-touch destination,  
the user must enter the destination twice for confirmation. By entering twice,  
you can prevent the destination from being incorrectly entered.  
Memory RX Setting  
Specify whether to use Memory RX Setting function. To use the function, specify a password for print.  
Press [No] to clear the entered setting and then specify a password using the keypad. (up to 8 digits)  
The following screen is displayed if two units of the Fax Kit FK-502 are installed, and [Individual Receiving  
Line Setup] is set to [ON] in Administrator Settings.  
Press [Yes] and then specify a password using the keypad. (up to 8 digits)  
The following items are not available if Memory RX Settings are configured.  
-
-
-
PC-Fax RX Settings  
TSI User Box Settings  
Forward TX Setting  
Reference  
-
For details on printing documents stored in a Memory RX User Box, refer to the [User's Guide Box Op-  
erations]  
-
You can also specify the registered group as the destination.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
10-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
10.4  
Administrator Settings (G3)  
10  
Closed Network RX  
Specify whether to use the Closed Network RX function. To use the function, specify a password that is used  
for Closed Network RX.  
Press [No] to clear the entered setting and then specify a password using the keypad. (up to 4 digits)  
Reference  
Closed Network RX is only available when the receiver has password transmission function.  
-
Forward TX Setting  
You can forward received documents to a preset recipient. The items that are to be configured are listed be-  
low.  
If two units of the Fax Kit FK-502 are installed, and [Individual Receiving Line Setup] is set to [ON] in Admin-  
istrator Settings, you can select either [Fax Line 1] or [Fax Line 2] to configure settings for each line. For details  
on [Individual Receiving Line Setup], refer to page 10-19.  
Item  
Description  
[Output Method]  
[Forward & Print]: Received document are forwarded and printed on this ma-  
chine.  
[Forward & Print (If TX Fails)]: Received documents are forwarded and, if for-  
warding fails, are printed on the machine.  
[Forward Dest.]  
[Select Line]  
Allows you to enter a fax number using up to 38 digits. It is also possible to  
select it from the address book.  
If two units of the Fax Kit FK-502 are installed, specify the line used to for-  
ward received faxes.  
The following items are not available if Forward TX Setting is configured.  
-
-
-
PC-Fax RX Settings  
TSI User Box Settings  
Memory RX Setting  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
10-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
10.4  
Administrator Settings (G3)  
10  
If [Confirm Address (Register)] is ON, a screen for entering the fax number again appears after you press [OK].  
Enter the fax number and then press [OK].  
d
Reference  
For details on the Confirm Address function, refer to page 10-21.  
Incomplete TX Hold  
This function temporarily retains documents failed to be transmitted in the Fax Retransmit User Box even with  
auto-redial due to a communications error or busy signals. To use Incomplete TX Hold function, specify the  
amount of time for retaining files.  
Reference  
-
For details on faxing and printing documents saved in a Fax Retransmit User Box, refer to the [User's  
Guide Box Operations].  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
10-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
10.4  
Administrator Settings (G3)  
10  
PC-Fax RX Settings  
Specify whether to use the PC-Fax RX function. To use the function, configure the following items.  
If two units of the Fax Kit FK-502 are installed, and [Individual Receiving Line Setup] is set to [ON] in Admin-  
istrator Settings, you can select either [Fax Line 1] or [Fax Line 2] to configure settings for each line. For details  
on [Individual Receiving Line Setup], refer to page 10-19.  
Reference  
-
The documents received by fax are saved in the TIFF format in a User Box.  
d
Reference  
For details on PC-Fax RX, refer to page 7-3.  
Item  
Description  
[Receiving User Box  
Destination]  
You can specify destinations in a Memory RX User Box or a Specified User  
Box. If [Specified User Box] is selected, destinations are saved in a User Box  
specified with an F code subaddress.  
[Print]  
Specify whether to print a fax after receiving.  
[Password Check]  
Specify a communication password (up to 7 digits).  
TSI User Box Setting  
Specify whether to use the TSI User Box function. To use the function, configure the following items.  
If two units of the Fax Kit FK-502 are installed, and [Individual Receiving Line Setup] is set to [ON] in Admin-  
istrator Settings, you can select either [Fax Line 1] or [Fax Line 2] to configure settings for each line. For details  
on [Individual Receiving Line Setup], refer to page 10-19.  
d
Reference  
For details on the TSI User Box function, refer to page 7-4.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
10-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
10.4  
Administrator Settings (G3)  
10  
Item  
Description  
[Action when TSI User Box is not set.]  
Configure how the machine should react when a specified  
User Box is not found.  
[Automatically Print]: Prints received documents.  
[Memory RX User Box]: Saves received documents in a Mem-  
ory RX User Box.  
[Specified User Box] : Saves received documents in a User  
Box of this machine. Click [Specified User Box] , and use the  
keypad to enter a User Box number.  
[Print]  
Specify whether to print a received document after receiving.  
[TSI User Box Registration]  
Register destinations to which to distribute RX documents.  
Up to 128 destinations can be registered. Select a desired  
number, and then press [Edit].  
[TSI User Box  
Settings]  
Allows you to distribute received faxes to other fax machines  
or User Boxes in this machine. Specify a sender's fax number  
in [Sender (TSI)].  
Specify a forwarding destination in [Forwarding Destination].  
To distribute received faxes to other fax machines, specify  
destinations with [Select from Address Book]. To distribute  
them to User Boxes in the machine, specify destinations with  
[Search by User Box Number].  
A User Box for which confidential reception is enabled, and  
a Relay User Box cannot be used for a forwarding destina-  
tion.  
Reference  
-
You can also specify the registered group as the destination.  
10.4.11 Fax Settings - PBX Connection Setting  
Specify the PBX line connection method.  
If the PBX connection mode is enabled, specify an access code for an outside line. An access code refers to  
a number used to connect to an outside line, such as a number beginning with a zero ("0").  
Outside line numbers specified here are dialed, after which fax numbers registered with the address book or  
program are dialed.  
Press [No] to clear the entered settings, and then specify an access code (0 to 9999) using the keypad.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
10-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
10.4  
Administrator Settings (G3)  
10  
10.4.12 Fax Settings - Report Settings  
Specify a way to output reports.  
1/3 page  
Item  
Description  
[Activity Report]  
Configure output settings for Activity Report. To output the re-  
port, configure the following settings.  
[Output Setting]  
Specify the time when the report is to be output.  
[Daily]: Outputs the report every day at a certain time.  
[Every 100 Comm.]: Outputs the report for every 100 commu-  
nication jobs.  
[100/Daily]: Outputs the latest 100 communication jobs every  
day at a certain time.  
[Output Time Set- Allows you to specify this item if [Daily] or [100/Daily] is select-  
tings]  
ed for Output Settings. Specify the time when to output the re-  
port.  
[Remark Column  
Print Setup]  
Specify the type of information printed in the remarks column  
of activity reports.  
[Remark Column Print Setup] is displayed if user authentica-  
tion or account track is enabled for this machine.  
[Normal Printing]: The line status or sending setting will be  
printed. For details, refer to page 8-10.  
[User Name Printing]: The user name for user authentication  
will be printed.  
[Account Name Printing]: The account name for account track  
will be printed.  
[TX Result Report]  
Configure the output settings for TX Result Report. Select out-  
put conditions.  
[Sequential TX Report]  
Configure the output settings for Sequential TX Report. Spec-  
ify whether to output the report.  
[Timer Reservation TX Report]  
[Confidential Rx Report]  
Configure the output settings for Timer Reservation TX Report.  
Specify whether to output the report.  
Configure the output settings for Confidential RX Report.  
Specify whether to output the report.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
10-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
10.4  
Administrator Settings (G3)  
10  
2/3 page  
Item  
Description  
[Bulletin TX Report]  
Configure the output settings for Bulletin TX Report. Specify whether to out-  
put the report.  
[Relay TX Result Report]  
[Relay Request Report]  
Configure the output settings for Relay TX Result Report. Specify whether to  
output the report.  
Configure the output settings for Relay Request Report. Specify whether to  
output the report.  
[PC-Fax TX Error Report] Configure the output settings for PC-Fax TX Error Report. Specify whether to  
output the report.  
[Broadcast Result Re-  
port]  
Configure the output settings for Broadcast Result Report. Select a way to  
output the report.  
With [1 Dest. at a time] selected, a broadcast result report is output only  
when a transmission still fails after redial attempt. No report is output  
when transmission is completed successfully.  
3/3 page  
Item  
Description  
[TX Result Report Check] Configure display settings for TX Result Report Check. Specify whether to  
display the report.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
10-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
10.4  
Administrator Settings (G3)  
10  
10.4.13 Fax Settings - Job Settings List  
This function outputs a list of settings related to faxes. Select a desired paper tray, and then press [Start].  
Reference  
For an example of output of a list of settings, refer to page 8-12.  
-
10.4.14 Fax Settings - Multi Line Settings  
If two units of the Fax Kit FK-502 are installed, configure settings for the second line.  
Line Parameter Setting  
Item  
Description  
[Dialing Method]  
Select one of the dialing methods from PB/10pps/20pps for the extension  
line.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
10-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
10.4  
Administrator Settings (G3)  
Item  
10  
Description  
[Number of RX Call  
Rings]  
Set the number of incoming call rings in the range between 0 and 15 (Default:  
2).  
[Line Monitor Sound]  
Set this item to ON to hear the line sound from a speaker during communi-  
cation through the extension line.  
Function Settings  
Item  
Description  
[PC-FAX TX Setting]  
Specify the line to use for PC-FAX transmissions.  
Multi Line Settings  
Select the communication method for the extension line from three options: TX and RX, RX Only, and TX Only.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
10-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
10.4  
Administrator Settings (G3)  
10  
Sender Fax No.  
Register a sender fax number for the extension line. The registered fax number is printed as the sender's in-  
formation on the document received by the recipient. Enter a sender fax number using 0-9, *, #, [+], and space  
(up to 20 characters).  
10.4.15 Security Settings - Security Details  
Manual Destination Input  
d
Reference  
For the setting procedure, refer to page 10-11.  
Restrict Fax TX  
Select whether to restrict fax transmissions. If [ON] is selected, the fax functions no longer appear on the  
Scan/Fax screen.  
Hide Personal Information  
d
Reference  
For the setting procedure, refer to page 10-11.  
Display Activity Log  
d
Reference  
For the setting procedure, refer to page 10-11.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
10-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
10.4  
Administrator Settings (G3)  
10  
Initialize  
d
Reference  
For the setting procedure, refer to page 10-11.  
Job History Thumbnail Display  
d
Reference  
For the setting procedure, refer to page 10-11.  
Copy Guard  
d
Reference  
For the setting procedure, refer to page 10-11.  
Password Copy  
d
Reference  
For the setting procedure, refer to page 10-11.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
10-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
10.5  
Administrator Settings (IP/I-FAX)  
10  
10.5  
Administrator Settings (IP/I-FAX)  
This section describes administrator settings that are configured for Internet Fax and IP Address Fax.  
10.5.1 System Settings - Power Save Setting - Enter Power Save Mode  
d
Reference  
For the setting procedure, refer to page 10-13.  
10.5.2 System Settings - Output Setting - Print/Fax Output Setting - Fax  
d
Reference  
For the setting procedure, refer to page 10-13.  
10.5.3 System Settings - Restrict User Access  
Restrict Access to Job Settings - Registering and Changing Addresses  
d
Reference  
For the setting procedure, refer to page 10-8.  
Restrict Access to Job Settings - Change the "From" Address  
The From address is used for the address configured for the device.  
d
Reference  
For the setting procedure, refer to page 10-8.  
Restrict Operation - Restrict Broadcasting  
d
Reference  
For the setting procedure, refer to page 10-9.  
10.5.4 System Settings - Stamp Settings - Fax TX Settings  
d
Reference  
For the setting procedure, refer to page 10-14.  
10.5.5 System Settings - Advanced Preview Setting - Original direction setting dis-  
play  
d
Reference  
For the setting procedure, refer to page 10-11.  
10.5.6 Fax Settings - Header Information  
Reference  
-
For Internet Fax or IP Address Fax, sender information is not available for [Outside Body Text]. Even if  
[Outside Body Text] is selected, sender information is added to the inside of the original.  
d
Reference  
For the setting procedure, refer to page 10-14.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
10-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
10.5  
Administrator Settings (IP/I-FAX)  
10  
10.5.7 Fax Settings - Header/Footer Position  
Reference  
-
For IP Address Fax in the color mode, reception information is not available for [Outside Body Text].  
Even if [Outside Body Text] is selected, sender information is added to the inside of the original.  
d
Reference  
For the setting procedure, refer to page 10-15.  
10.5.8 Fax Settings - Line Parameter Setting (IP)  
Number of Redials  
d
Reference  
For the setting procedure, refer to page 10-17.  
Redial Interval  
d
Reference  
For the setting procedure, refer to page 10-17.  
10.5.9 Fax Settings - TX/RX Settings  
Reference  
-
-
-
To enable the setting for [Print Paper Size], set [Tray Selection for RX Print] to [Auto].  
The available tray types vary depending on the options that are installed.  
To receive a fax in the color mode, documents are always recorded in full size for IP address fax, and  
recorded after being reduced to the appropriate print paper size for Internet fax.  
-
To receive a fax in the color mode, Print Separate Fax Pages cannot be used.  
d
Reference  
For the setting procedure, refer to page 10-19.  
10.5.10 Fax Settings - Function Settings  
Function ON/OFF Setting - Destination Check Display Function  
d
Reference  
For the setting procedure, refer to page 10-21.  
Memory RX Setting  
d
Reference  
For the setting procedure, refer to page 10-22.  
10.5.11 Fax Settings - Report Settings  
Activity Report  
d
Reference  
For the setting procedure, refer to page 10-27.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
10-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
10.5  
Administrator Settings (IP/I-FAX)  
10  
TX Result Report  
d
Reference  
For the setting procedure, refer to page 10-27.  
Sequential TX Report  
d
Reference  
For the setting procedure, refer to page 10-27.  
Broadcast Result Report  
d
Reference  
For the setting procedure, refer to page 10-27.  
TX Result Report Check  
d
Reference  
For the setting procedure, refer to page 10-27.  
Network Fax RX Error Report  
Configure the output settings for the Network Fax RX Error Report. Specify whether to output the body.  
MDN Message (I-FAX)  
Configure the output settings for MDN messages in Network Fax. Specify whether to output the body.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
10-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
10.5  
Administrator Settings (IP/I-FAX)  
10  
DSN Message (I-FAX)  
Configure the output settings for DSN messages in Network Fax. Specify whether to output the body.  
Print E-mail Message Body (I-FAX)  
Configure the output settings for body of successfully received E-mail. Specify whether to output the body.  
10.5.12 Fax Settings - Job Settings List  
d
Reference  
For the setting procedure, refer to page 10-29.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
10-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
10.5  
Administrator Settings (IP/I-FAX)  
10  
10.5.13 Fax Settings - Network Fax Settings  
Configure the settings for Internet Fax and IP Address Fax.  
Black Compression Level  
Specify the device capabilities for fax transmissions when sending faxes with the file format selected to TIFF.  
-
-
-
[MMR] (default): The data size is smaller.  
[MR]: The data size is intermediate between MMR and MH.  
[MH]: The data size is larger.  
Color/Grayscale Multi-Value Compression Method  
Specify the device capabilities for fax transmissions when sending faxes with the file format selected to JPEG  
or PDF.  
-
-
-
[JPEG Color] (default): Compresses data in color JPEG format.  
[JPEG (Gray Scale)]: Compresses data in monochrome JPEG format.  
[Not Set]: Compresses data in the method specified in [Black Compression Level] while the sending ca-  
pability in the color or gray scale mode is disabled.  
Reference  
-
This setting is not reflected in Compact PDF since Compact PDF files are compressed using values  
fixed to the machine.  
-
If [Not Set] is selected, data is converted to the TIFF format to be sent even if any file format has been  
specified.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
10-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
10.5  
Administrator Settings (IP/I-FAX)  
10  
Internet Fax Self RX Ability (I-FAX)  
This item appears if the Internet fax function is available. When an MDN request is sent from a recipient ma-  
chine, the machine sends information that is configured for its own capabilities. Configure the settings for the  
compression format, paper size and resolution.  
Item  
Description  
[Compression Type]  
[Paper Size]  
[Resolution]  
Select the compression type of a fax job the machine can receive.  
Select the paper size for a fax job the machine can receive.  
Select the resolution of a fax job the machine can receive.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
10-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
10.5  
Administrator Settings (IP/I-FAX)  
10  
Internet Fax Advanced Settings (I-FAX)  
This item appears if the Internet fax function is available. You can configure detailed settings for Internet fax-  
es.  
1/2 page  
Item  
Description  
[MDN Request]  
Specify whether to request for an MDN to the recipient machine when send-  
ing a fax.  
If both MDN Request and DSN Request are set to [Yes], the setting for  
MDN Request is given priority.  
[DSN Request]  
Select whether to request for a DSN to the recipient machine when sending  
a fax.  
[MDN Response]  
Select whether to respond to an MDN request from the recipient machine  
when receiving a fax.  
[MDN/DSN Response  
Monitoring Time]  
Specify whether to monitor DSN and MDN responses. To monitor them, en-  
ter the number of hours.  
[Maximum Resolution]  
Select the maximum resolution of the machine.  
2/2 page  
Item  
Description  
[Add ContentType Infor-  
mation]  
Specify whether to add Content-Type information to an Internet fax when  
sending it.  
If [Yes] is selected, "application=faxbw" is added to the Content-Type header  
of MIME as a sub type.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
10-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
10.5  
Administrator Settings (IP/I-FAX)  
10  
IP Address Fax Setting  
Specify the operation mode for IP Address Fax.  
Item  
Description  
[Mode 1]  
This mode allows communication between Konica Minolta models capable  
of transmitting IP address faxes and models compatible with the Direct  
SMTP standard defined by CIAJ. However, a unique method developed for  
Konica Minolta models is used to transmit a color fax.  
[Mode 2]  
This mode allows communication between Konica Minolta models capable  
of transmitting IP address faxes and models compatible with the Direct  
SMTP standard defined by CIAJ. The transmission in color mode is per-  
formed in the communication mode (Profile-C format) compatible with the Di-  
rect SMTP standard.  
[Sending Colored Docu-  
ments]  
Available when mode 2 is selected. To send a fax to a machine that does not  
support the color reception based on the Direct SMTP standard, select [Re-  
strict].  
Reference  
-
When selecting mode 2, check that the recipient's machine supports color reception based on the di-  
rect SMTP standard.  
-
CIAJ stands for Communications and Information network Association of Japan.  
10.5.14 Security Settings - Security Details  
Manual Destination Input  
d
Reference  
For the setting procedure, refer to page 10-11.  
Restrict Fax TX  
d
Reference  
For the setting procedure, refer to page 10-31.  
Hide Personal Information  
d
Reference  
For the setting procedure, refer to page 10-11.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
10-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
10.5  
Administrator Settings (IP/I-FAX)  
10  
Display Activity Log  
d
Reference  
For the setting procedure, refer to page 10-11.  
Initialize  
d
Reference  
For the setting procedure, refer to page 10-11.  
Job History Thumbnail Display  
d
Reference  
For the setting procedure, refer to page 10-11.  
Copy Guard  
d
Reference  
For the setting procedure, refer to page 10-11.  
Password Copy  
d
Reference  
For the setting procedure, refer to page 10-11.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
10-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11.1  
Using PageScope Web Connection  
11  
11 PageScope Web Connection  
This chapter explains functions of a device management utility PageScope Web Connection.  
11.1  
Using PageScope Web Connection  
PageScope Web Connection is a device control utility provided by the HTTP server built in the printer con-  
troller. Using a Web browser on a computer connected to the network, you can change machine settings and  
check the status of the machine. Using this utility, you can configure some settings, which are to be handled  
in the control panel of this machine, through your computer, and also smoothly enter characters.  
11.1.1 Operating environment  
Network  
Ethernet (TCP/IP)  
Applications on compu-  
ter  
Web browser:  
<For Windows NT4.0/2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista>  
Microsoft Internet Explorer Ver. 6/7/8 (JavaScript and Cookies enabled)  
Netscape Navigator 7.02 or later (JavaScript and Cookies enabled)  
Mozilla Firefox 1.0 or later (JavaScript and Cookies enabled)  
<For Macintosh MacOS 9.x/MacOS X>  
Netscape Navigator 7.02 or later (JavaScript and Cookies enabled)  
Mozilla Firefox 1.0 or later (JavaScript and Cookies enabled)  
<For Linux>  
Netscape Navigator 7.02 or later (JavaScript and Cookies enabled)  
Mozilla Firefox 1.0 or later (JavaScript and Cookies enabled)  
®
®
Adobe Flash Player:  
Plug-in Ver.7.0 or later required to select Flash as the display format.  
Plug-in Ver.9.0 or later required to use the Data Management Utility  
(font/macro data management).  
11.1.2 How to access  
0
0
0
0
Start the Web browser to access PageScope Web Connection.  
If User Authentication is enabled, enter the user name and password. For details, refer to page 11-10.  
For details on setting the IP address of this machine, refer to [User's Guide Network Administrator].  
PageScope Web Connection has two view modes: Flash and HTML. For details, refer to page 11-8.  
1
2
Start the Web browser.  
Enter the IP address of the machine in the URL field, and then press [Enter]. http://<IP address of the  
machine>/  
Example: When the IP address of this machine is 192.168.1.20:  
http://192.168.1.20/  
When IPv6 is set to [ON] while a browser other than Internet Explorer 6 is used:  
-
-
Enter the IPv6 address enclosed in brackets [ ] to access PageScope Web Connection.  
http://[IPv6 address of this machine]/  
Example: When the IPv6 address of this machine is fe80::220:6bff:fe10:2f16:  
-
-
http://[fe80::220:6bff:fe10:2f16]/  
If IPv6 is set to [ON] while Internet Explorer is used, add "fe80::220:6bff:fe10:2f IPv6_MFP_1" to the  
hosts file in advance, and specify the address with the domain name.  
The main menu or login page appears.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
11-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
11.1  
Using PageScope Web Connection  
11  
11.1.3 Cache function of Web browser  
The Web browser has the cache function; therefore, the latest information may not be shown in the page dis-  
played using PageScope Web Connection. Using the cache function may result in an operation failure.  
When using PageScope Web Connection, disable the cache function on the Web browser.  
Reference  
-
Some Web browser versions may provide different menus and item names. For details, refer to the Help  
for the Web browser.  
-
With the cache function enabled, timeout occurs in the administrator mode, and after that, how many  
time you try to access, just timeout recurs. It results in the control panel of this machine being locked,  
and you cannot handle the control panel. In this case, turn the main power off, and then turn it on again.  
To avoid this problem, disable the cache function.  
For Internet Explorer  
1
2
3
Select [Internet Options] in the [Tools] menu.  
In the [General] tab, select [Temporary Internet files] - [Settings].  
Select [Every visit to the page], and click [OK].  
For Netscape Navigator  
1
2
3
Select [Preferences] in the [Edit] menu.  
In [Category] on the left, select [Advanced] - [Cache].  
In [Document in cache is compared to document on network], select [Every time].  
For Mozilla Firefox  
1
2
3
Select [Options] in the [Tools] menu.  
Select [Privacy], and then click [Settings] in the Private Data section.  
Select the [Cache] check box under [Private Data] select the [Clear private data when closing Firefox]  
check box under [Settings], and then click [OK].  
11.1.4 Online help function  
You can display the online help regarding the function being configured after logging in to PageScope Web  
Connection and clicking  
.
Reference  
-
To display the online help, you must connect your computer to the Internet.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
11-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
11.2  
Logging in and logging out  
11  
11.2  
Logging in and logging out  
11.2.1 Login and logout flows  
Accessing with PageScope Web Connection displays the login page when User Authentication or Account  
Track is enabled, and displays the login page in the public user mode when User Authentication or Account  
Track is not enabled. When re-logging in to this machine as a different user or as an administrator, log out  
once, and log in again.  
When user authentication or account track is not enabled  
You are automatically logged in as a public user.  
To log in as an administrator, log out once.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
11-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
11.2  
Logging in and logging out  
11  
Login as an administrator again.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
11-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11.2  
Logging in and logging out  
11  
When User Authentication or Account Track is enabled  
If PageScope Authentication Manager is used for authentication, ask your server administrator about the lo-  
gin procedure.  
The User Authentication or Account Track page appears. Enter the required items to log in.  
To log in as a different user or as an administrator, log out once.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
11-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
11.2  
Logging in and logging out  
11  
Log in again.  
11.2.2 Logout  
Click [Logout] or [To Login Screen] at the upper right of the window. A logout confirmation page appears.  
Click [OK] to return to the login page.  
Reference  
-
-
The login page that appears differs depending on whether Authentication is enabled in this machine.  
When logged in as a public user, [To Login Screen] appears. When logged in as a registered user or an  
administrator, [Logout] appears.  
-
-
If timeout occurred because no operation was performed for the specified period during login or if au-  
thentication setting was changed using the control panel while logging in to the user mode, you will au-  
tomatically log out of the mode.  
For details on how to specify the timeout period of the user or administrator modes, refer to page 11-24.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
11-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
11.2  
Logging in and logging out  
11  
11.2.3 Login  
PageScope Web Connection provides the user or administrator mode depending on how to log in. If nec-  
essary, you can log in to the user mode as an administrator or User Box administrator depending on user  
authentication or User Box administrator setting.  
Reference  
-
You can log in as a User Box administrator when the User Box administrator is enabled using the con-  
trol panel. For details on the User Box administrator settings, permissions and password settings, refer  
to the [User's Guide Box Operations].  
-
-
When logged in to the user mode as an administrator, jobs that could not be deleted in the administrator  
mode can be deleted.  
In the login page, select the desired Data Management Utility. For details on Data Management Utility,  
refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator].  
Login options  
You can select items as required when logging in.  
Item  
Description  
[Language]  
[View Mode]  
Select the display language.  
Select Flash or HTML.  
If the screen reader software is used, we recommend selecting [HTML] as the  
view mode.  
In an IPv6 environment, select [HTML].  
Flash Player is required when selecting [Flash].  
[User Assist]  
Reference  
Select the [Display dialog box in case of warning.] check box to display the dialog  
box when a warning has occurred or during operation after login.  
-
If [Flash] is selected in [View Mode], the following items are displayed using Flash.  
Status icons and messages  
Status of [Paper Tray] in [Information] - [Device Information]  
Status of [Job]  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
11-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
11.2  
Logging in and logging out  
11  
Logging in as a public user  
If user authentication is not enabled on the machine, you will be logging in as a public user. In the login page,  
select [Public User], and click [Login].  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
11-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
11.2  
Logging in and logging out  
11  
Logging in as a registered user  
Specify the registered user name and password to log in when User Authentication is enabled in this ma-  
chine.  
%
In the login page, enter the user name and the password, and click [Login].  
Reference  
-
-
-
-
If Account Track is enabled, also enter the account name and password.  
To select a user name from a list, click [User List].  
If External Server Authentication is enabled, select a server.  
To log in to the user mode as an administrator, select [Administrator] - [Administrator (User Mode)], and  
enter the administrator password.  
-
-
If [Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error] in Administrator Settings is set to Mode 2 and a user  
enters an incorrect password the specified number of times, that user will be locked out and will no  
longer be able to use the machine. Contact your administrator to cancel operation restrictions.  
[User List] is available only when [User Name List] is set to [ON]. For details, refer to the [User's Guide  
Copy Operations].  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
11-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
11.2  
Logging in and logging out  
11  
Logging in to administrator mode  
To configure the system or network setting, log in to the administrator mode.  
1
Select [Administrator], and then click [Login].  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
11-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
11.2  
Logging in and logging out  
11  
2
Enter the administrator password, and then click [OK].  
% To log in to the user mode as an administrator, select [Administrator (User Mode)], and enter the  
administrator password.  
% Logging in to the administrator mode locks the control panel of this machine, and you will not be  
able to use it.  
% Depending on the status of this machine, you may not be able to log in to the administrator mode.  
% If [Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error] in the Administrator Settings is set to Mode 2  
and an incorrect password is entered the specified number of times, it is no longer possible to log  
in to the administrator mode. For details on the Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error pa-  
rameter, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations].  
% The password entry page varies depending on the machine settings.  
% You can display the explanation of functions (Help) when necessary. To display Help, select [ON] in  
Display Setting.  
[On Mouse]: Point the cursor to display Help.  
[On Focus]: Select an item to display Help.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
11-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11.2  
Logging in and logging out  
11  
Display mode in administrator mode  
In [System Settings] - [Display Setting], the display mode in the administrator mode can be selected from [Tab  
Function Display] or [List Function Display]. This manual shows an example where the [List Function Display]  
is set.  
In either display mode, the available items are the same.  
In the default setting, the screen is displayed in [Tab Function Display].  
In [Tab Function Display], click the desired icon to change the menu.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
11-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
11.2  
Logging in and logging out  
11  
In [List Function Display], change the menu from the list box.  
Select the desired menu in the drop-down list, click [Display].  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
11-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11.2  
Logging in and logging out  
11  
Logging in as a User Box administrator  
You can log in to the user mode as an administrator to delete a job when User Authentication is enabled in  
this machine. If necessary, you can log in to the user mode as a User Box administrator when the User Box  
administrator is enabled using the control panel.  
%
In the login page, select [Administrator] and click [Login].  
% To log in to the user mode as a User Box administrator, select [User Box Administrator], and enter  
the User Box administrator's password.  
Reference  
-
To log in to the user mode as an administrator, select [Administrator] - [Administrator (User Mode)], and  
enter the administrator password.  
-
If [Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error] in the Administrator Settings is set to Mode 2 and  
an incorrect password is entered the specified number of times, it is no longer possible to log in to the  
administrator mode. For details on the Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error parameter, refer  
to the [User's Guide Copy Operations].  
-
-
The password entry page varies depending on the machine settings.  
You can display the descriptions of functions (Help) if necessary. To display Help, select [ON] in Display  
Setting.  
[On Mouse]: Points the cursor to display Help.  
[On Focus]: Select this item to display Help.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
11-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
11.3  
Page Configuration  
11  
11.3  
Page Configuration  
The page that appears after logging in to PageScope Web Connection is configured as shown below. The  
following shows an example of the page displayed when Device Information is selected in the Information tab.  
Reference  
-
The contents of the PageScope Web Connection pages vary depending on the options installed in  
this machine or the settings of this machine.  
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
10  
11  
12  
No.  
Item  
Description  
1
KONICA MINOLTA logo  
Click this logo to jump to the Konica Minolta Web site at the follow-  
ing URL. http://www.konicaminolta.com/  
2
3
PageScope Web Con-  
Click this logo to display the version information of PageScope Web  
nection logo  
Connection.  
Login user name  
Displays the current login mode icon and user name (public, admin-  
istrator, User Box administrator, registered user, or account). Click  
the user name to display the login user name.  
4
5
Status display  
Displays the status of the printer and scanner sections of this ma-  
chine with icons and messages. Clicking the desired icon when an  
error occurs displays the information (Consumable Info, Paper Tray,  
or user registration page) associated with the icon to enable you to  
check the status.  
Message display  
Displays the operating status of this machine.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
11-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
11.3  
Page Configuration  
11  
No.  
Item  
Description  
6
[To Login Screen]/ [Log-  
out]  
Click this button to log out the current mode and log in again. When  
logged in as a public user, [To Login Screen] appears. When logged  
in as a registered user or an administrator, [Logout] appears.  
7
8
[Change Password]  
Help  
Click this button to jump to the user password change page. This  
button appears only in the user mode page in which you logged in  
as a registered user.  
You can display the online help regarding the function being config-  
ured. For details, refer to page 11-23.  
9
Refresh  
Icon  
Click this icon to refresh the information displayed in the page.  
10  
Select the category of the item to be displayed. The following icons  
are displayed in the user mode.  
Information  
Job  
User Box  
Direct Print  
Store Address  
Customize  
11  
12  
Menu  
Displays information and setting for the selected icon. The menu that  
appears in this area varies depending on which icon was selected.  
Information and settings  
Displays the details of the item selected in the menu.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
11-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11.4  
User Mode Overview  
11  
11.4  
User Mode Overview  
Logging in to the user mode enables you to configure the following functions.  
11.4.1 Information  
d
Reference  
You can also check the explanation of the user mode in the PageScope Web Connection online help or  
PageScope Web Connection manual included in the application CD-ROM. For details on the online help,  
Item  
Description  
[Device Informa-  
tion]  
Enables you to check the components, options, consumables, and meter counts of  
this machine.  
[Online Assist-  
ance]  
Enables you to check the online assistance about this product.  
[Change User  
Password]  
Changes the password of the login user.  
[Function Permis-  
sion Information]  
Enables you to check the function permission information about the user or account.  
Enables you to check the network settings of this machine.  
Enables you to check the printer controller settings of this machine.  
Prints font or configuration information.  
[Network Setting  
Information]  
[Print Setting In-  
formation]  
[Print Information]  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
11-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
11.4  
User Mode Overview  
11  
11.4.2 Job  
Item  
Description  
[Current Jobs]  
Enables you to check the currently executed job or queued jobs.  
Enables you to check the executed jobs.  
[Job History]  
[Communication  
List]  
Enables you to check the completed transmission and reception jobs.  
11.4.3 User Boxes  
d
Reference  
For details on the operating procedures for User Boxes, refer to the [User's Guide Box Operations].  
Item  
Description  
[Open User Box]  
Opens the currently created User Box (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) to en-  
able you to print, send, or download a document saved in the User Box or to change  
the User Box setting.  
[Create User Box]  
Enables to create a new User Box.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
11-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
11.4  
User Mode Overview  
Item  
11  
Description  
[Open System  
User Box]  
Displayed when the optional Fax Kit FK-502 is installed. This function opens the  
System User Box (Bulletin Board, Polling TX, Memory RX, or Relay User Box) to en-  
able you to handle a document saved in the User Box or change the User Box set-  
ting.  
[Create System  
User Box]  
Displayed when the optional Fax Kit FK-502 is installed. This function enables you  
to create a new Bulletin Board or Relay User Box.  
11.4.4 Direct Print  
Item  
Description  
[Direct Print]  
Specify a file saved in the computer to print it using this machine. If necessary, you  
can select Application to save a document in the specified User Box.  
Reference  
-
[Direct Print] may not be displayed depending on settings in the administrator mode.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
11-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
11.4  
User Mode Overview  
11  
11.4.5 Store Address  
[Store Address] may not be displayed depending on settings in the administrator mode.  
Item  
Description  
[Address Book]  
Enables you to check the address book registered in this machine or to register and  
change an address.  
[Group]  
Enables you to check the group address book registered in this machine or to reg-  
ister and change an address.  
[Program]  
Enables you to check the program address book registered in this machine or to  
register and change an address.  
[Temporary One-  
Touch]  
Enables you to check the temporary program address book registered in this ma-  
chine or to register and change an address.  
[Subject]  
[Text]  
Enables you to register or change up to 10 subjects when sending E-mails.  
Enables you to register or change up to 10 body messages when sending E-mails.  
11.4.6 Customize  
This function enables you to specify the initial screen after logging in.  
Item  
Description  
[Option]  
Enables you to configure the settings displayed in the initial page after logging in to  
this machine.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
11-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
11.5  
Administrator Mode Overview  
11  
11.5  
Administrator Mode Overview  
Logging in to the administrator mode enables you to use the following functions.  
Reference  
-
-
For details on the administrator mode, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator].  
The administrator modes are classified into two display modes: [Tab Function Display] and [List Func-  
tion Display]. This manual shows an example where the [List Function Display] is set. For details, refer  
11.5.1 Maintenance  
Item  
Description  
[Meter Count]  
[ROM Version]  
[Import/Export]  
Enables you to check the meter count of this machine.  
Enables you to check the ROM version.  
Saves (exports) setting information of this machine as a file, or writes (imports) it  
from a file to this machine.  
[Status Notifica-  
tion Setting]  
Configure the function to be reported to a registered user when an error has oc-  
curred in this machine. Specify the destination and items to notify a registered user  
of an error.  
[Total Counter  
Notification Set-  
ting]  
Configure the setting to notify the target user of the total counter by E-mail, and reg-  
ister the E-mail address of the destination.  
[Date/Time Set-  
ting]  
Specify the date and time displayed in this machine.  
[Timer Setting]  
Configure Power Save or Weekly Timer Setting in this machine.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
11-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
11.5  
Administrator Mode Overview  
11  
Item  
Description  
[Network Error  
Code Display  
Setting]  
Specify whether to display the network error code.  
[Reset]  
Clears all settings for the network, controller and destinations.  
[License Settings]  
Allows you to issue a license and enable functions. Also, a request code can be is-  
sued.  
[Edit Font/Macro]  
[Job Log]  
Adds font or macro.  
You can create and download log data of the jobs that were executed in this ma-  
chine.  
11.5.2 System Settings  
Reference  
-
To use this machine as a scanner with the application software under TWAIN, install the dedicated driv-  
er software KONICA MINOLTA TWAIN. For details, refer to the TWAIN driver manual in the CD sup-  
plied together with this machine.  
Item  
Description  
[Machine Setting]  
Changes the registration information of this machine.  
[Register Sup-  
port Information]  
Specify support information (such as contact name, corporate URL, or online man-  
ual URL) of this machine. To display this information, select [Information] - [Online  
Assistance].  
[Network TWAIN]  
Specify the time to release the operation lock when scanning (excluding push-scan-  
ning).  
[User Box Setting] Define the User Box functions such as deleting an unnecessary User Box or speci-  
fying the document deletion time. If necessary, configure settings to enable saving  
or reading a document in or from the external memory.  
[Stamp Settings]  
Register a header or footer.  
[Blank Page Print  
Settings]  
Specify whether to print contents configured in [Stamp/Composition] on blank pag-  
es.  
[Skip Job Opera-  
tion Settings]  
Specify whether to skip a job.  
[Flash Display  
Setting]  
Specify whether to allow or restrict the flash display.  
[System Connec-  
tion Setting]  
Configure the automatic setting of Prefix/Suffix or the setting for printing data in a  
cellular phone.  
[Display Setting]  
Select the display mode in the administrator mode from [Tab Function Display] or  
[List Function Display].  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
11-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
11.5  
Administrator Mode Overview  
11  
Item  
Description  
[Outline PDF Set-  
ting]  
Specify whether to outline text.  
11.5.3 Security  
Item  
Description  
[PKI Settings]  
Register device certificates and configure the SSL, protocol, or external certificate  
settings.  
[Certificate Verifi-  
cation Settings]  
Specify the items to validate a certificate.  
[Address Refer-  
ence Setting]  
When giving destination access permission, specify a reference allowed group  
name or access allowed level.  
[Restrict User Ac-  
cess]  
Specify the function to restrict user operations.  
[Copy Security]  
[Auto Logout]  
Specify whether to use the copy guard or password copy function.  
Specify the time to automatically log out the administrator or user mode.  
Specify the password to log in to the administrator mode.  
[Administrator  
Password Set-  
ting]  
[Administrator Password Setting] is not displayed when:  
-
-
-
The SSL certificate is not installed  
Enhanced Security Mode is set to [ON]  
[Mode Using SSL/TLS] is set to [None] in [Security] - [PKI Settings] - [SSL Setting] even though a device  
certificate is already registered  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
11-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
11.5  
Administrator Mode Overview  
11  
11.5.4 User Authentication/Account Track  
Item  
Description  
[General Settings]  
Configure the User Authentication or Account Track setting in this machine. To en-  
able authentication, configure the number of assigned counters or the When  
Number of Jobs Reach Maximum setting.  
[User Authentica-  
tion Setting]  
When enabling User Authentication, register the target user or configure user set-  
ting.  
[Account Track  
Settings]  
When enabling Account Track, register and edit the target account.  
When enabling external server authentication, register the external server.  
Specify the upper limit of the number of User Boxes.  
[External Server  
Settings]  
[Public User Box  
Setting]  
[User/Account  
Common Setting]  
Specify whether to print data in single color or two-color mode.  
Configure the setting to send a file to the Home folder.  
[Scan to Home  
Settings]  
[Scan to Author-  
ized Folder Set-  
tings]  
Configure settings to restrict manual transmission destinations.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
11-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
11.5  
Administrator Mode Overview  
11  
11.5.5 Network  
Item  
Description  
[TCP/IP Setting]  
Configure the TCP/IP setting when connecting this machine via network.  
[E-mail Setting]  
Configure the settings to send or receive E-mails (including Internet fax), and specify  
the extension function such as E-mail authentication.  
[LDAP Setting]  
[IPP Setting]  
Configure the settings to register the LDAP server.  
Configure the IPP print setting.  
[FTP Setting]  
[SNMP Setting]  
[SMB Setting]  
Configure the settings to use this machine as an FTP client or server.  
Configure SNMP settings.  
Configure the SMB client, WINS, or SMB print setting.  
[Web Service Set- Configure the settings to perform scanning or printing using Web services.  
tings]  
[Bonjour Setting]  
[NetWare Setting]  
Configure Bonjour settings.  
Configure NetWare settings.  
Configure AppleTalk settings.  
[AppleTalk Set-  
ting]  
[Network Fax Set- Configure the direct SMTP TX or direct SMTP RX settings.  
ting]  
[WebDAV Set-  
tings]  
Configure the WebDAV settings.  
[OpenAPI Setting]  
Configure the OpenAPI settings.  
[TCP Socket Set-  
ting]  
Configure the TCP Socket settings to have a data communication between this ma-  
chine and the application software in your computer.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
11-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
11.5  
Administrator Mode Overview  
11  
Item  
Description  
[IEEE802.1x Au-  
thentication Set-  
ting]  
Configure IEEE802.1X authentication settings.  
[LLTD Setting]  
Select whether to enable or disable LLTD.  
Configure the SSDP settings.  
[SSDP Settings]  
[Bluetooth Set-  
ting]  
Select whether to enable or disable Bluetooth.  
To enable a Bluetooth communication, contact your service representative in ad-  
vance.  
11.5.6 User Boxes  
Logging in to the administrator mode enables you to handle a User Box without entering the password when  
opening it.  
Item  
Description  
[Open User Box]  
Allows you to open the currently created User Box (Public, Group, or Personal User  
Box) and change the User Box setting.  
Document operations are not available in the administrator mode.  
User Box operations are available even if a password is specified for the target  
User Box.  
[Create User Box]  
Enables to create a new User Box.  
[Open System  
User Box]  
Allows you to open the System User Box (Bulletin Board User Box, Relay User Box,  
or Annotation User Box) and handle a document saved in the User Box or change  
the User Box setting.  
The Bulletin Board User Boxes and Relay User Boxes are available when the op-  
tional Fax Kit FK-502 is installed.  
[Create System  
User Box]  
Enables you to create a new Annotation, Bulletin Board, or Relay User Box.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
11-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
11.5  
Administrator Mode Overview  
11  
11.5.7 Printer Settings  
Item  
Description  
[Basic Setting]  
[PCL Setting]  
[PS Setting]  
[TIFF Setting]  
[XPS Settings]  
[Interface Setting]  
Specify the default values of the printer.  
Specify the default values in the PCL mode.  
Specify the default values in the PS mode.  
Configure paper settings for TIFF mode.  
Configure the XPS print settings.  
Specify the timeout period of the interface.  
[Direct Print Set-  
tings]  
Configure the settings to enable direct printing using PageScope Web Connection.  
[Assign Account  
to Acquire Device  
Info]  
Select whether to specify a password to obtain device information through the print-  
er driver. If [ON] is selected, specify the password.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
11-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
11.5  
Administrator Mode Overview  
11  
11.5.8 Store Address  
Item  
Description  
[Address Book]  
Enables you to check the address book registered in this machine or to register and  
change an address.  
[Group]  
Enables you to check the group address book registered in this machine or to reg-  
ister and change an address.  
[Program]  
Enables you to check the program address book registered in this machine or to  
register and change an address.  
[Temporary One-  
Touch]  
Enables you to check the temporary program address book registered in this ma-  
chine or to register and change an address.  
[Subject]  
[Text]  
Registers up to 10 subjects when sending E-mails.  
Registers up to 10 body messages to be used when sending E-mails.  
[Application Reg-  
istration]  
Registers application settings and server addresses when using the applications  
such as RightFax Server registered in the external server. Registering applications  
and servers enables you to automatically connect to the server of the selected ap-  
plication.  
[Application Registration] is not displayed when the optional Fax Kit FK-502 is  
installed.  
[Prefix/Suffix]  
Registers Prefix or Suffix to be added as destination information when E-mailing.  
11.5.9 Fax Settings  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
11-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
11.5  
Administrator Mode Overview  
11  
Item  
Description  
[Header/Footer  
Position]  
Configure the setting to print the sender or receiving information.  
[Line Parameter  
Setting]  
Specify the fax line such as Dialing Method.  
[TX/RX Settings]  
[Function Setting]  
Configure the paper, User Box, and other settings for sending or receiving data.  
Configure the fax settings for Memory RX or Network Fax.  
Specify the outside line at PBX connection.  
[PBX Connection  
Setting]  
[Report Settings]  
Configure the setting for a report, for example, Activity Report, to be output when  
sending or receiving data.  
[Multi Line Set-  
tings]  
Specify the parameters and functions of the extended line.  
This item is displayed when a line is extended.  
[Network Fax Set- Configure the setting to use network fax.  
ting]  
[Header Informa-  
tion]  
Registers sender information and fax number when sending data.  
11.5.10 Setting for each purpose  
For an item with multiple settings required, configure them according to the instructions shown in the win-  
dow.  
The available setting items are as follows.  
-
-
-
Configure the settings for sending a scanned document  
Configure the network print settings  
Restrict users using this machine  
Reference  
-
-
As the setting procedure proceeds, its progress flow is displayed on the left.  
If setting is cancelled, you will return to the Setting for each purpose screen after the items that were  
configured before cancellation have been applied  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
11-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
12 Troubleshooting for fax and  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12.1  
Cannot send faxes  
12  
12 Troubleshooting for fax and scanning problems  
This chapter provides solutions for some problems you encounter while using fax and scanning functions. If  
you encounter a problem which is not listed in this chapter or difficult to solve, please contact your service  
representative.  
12.1  
Cannot send faxes  
When a fax cannot be sent, try to correct problems by referring to the table below. If the fax still cannot be  
sent properly even after attempting to correct the problem, please contact your service representative.  
d
Reference  
If you are unable to send a fax, the TX Result Report is output. For details, refer to page 8-12. (When printing  
the TX Result Report is enabled)  
For details on error messages, Refer to page 12-6.  
For problems such as jamming of originals, paper jams, poor image quality or exhausted toner, refer to the  
[User's Guide Copy Operations]  
12.1.1 G3 Fax  
Check points  
Corrective Actions  
Was the transmission  
procedure carried out  
correctly?  
Check the transmission procedure and then resend the fax.  
Is the recipient's fax  
number correct? Were  
the address book desti-  
nation and program des-  
tination registered  
There may be an error in registering the fax number when address book des-  
tination and program destination are used.  
Print the list of address book destinations to check that the numbers are reg-  
istered correctly.  
Correct if an error is found.  
correctly?  
Is the telephone line set-  
ting correct?  
Does the setting in [Dialing Method] in the Utility mode match the telephone  
line being used? Check the setting and correct it if an error is found.  
Is the telephone line cor-  
rectly connected?  
Is the telephone line disconnected?  
Check the telephone cord for connection and, if unplugged, plug it securely.  
Is there a problem with  
the receiving machine?  
Is the power of the receiving facsimile turned off, is it out of paper or is there  
another problem?  
Call the recipient to determine whether there is a problem.  
Was a correct password  
sent?  
Check the recipient's password and then resend the fax using a correct  
password.  
Was the sender's fax  
number correctly regis-  
tered with "Check Dest.  
& Send"?  
Check that the fax number registered with the recipient is correct. Or, send  
a fax with Check Dest. & Send set to [No].  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
12-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
12.1  
Cannot send faxes  
12  
12.1.2 Network fax or network scan sending  
If you cannot send a fax while using the Internet Fax, IP Address Fax, E-mail, SMB, FTP, WebDAV or Web  
Service functions, follow the steps below to identify the problem.  
Check points  
Corrective Actions  
Does the size of E-mail to  
be sent exceed the  
SMTP server capacity?  
If the size of E-mail exceeds the SMTP server capacity (if specified), an error  
occurs and the E-mail cannot be sent. For details on the SMTP server capac-  
ity settings, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator].  
Was the transmission  
procedure carried out  
correctly?  
Check the transmission procedure and then resend the fax. For details on the  
transmission procedure, refer to page 5-2.  
Are the network settings  
and connection correct?  
Check the network settings and connection. For details on the network set-  
tings, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator].  
Is the E-mail address of  
the machine configured?  
Check the E-mail address of the machine and configure it. For details on con-  
figuring the E-mail address, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administra-  
tor].  
Are cables connected  
correctly?  
Check that the network cable, modular cable, and any other relevant connec-  
tors are correctly connected.  
Is the recipient's fax  
number or address cor-  
rect? Were the address  
book destination and  
program destination reg-  
istered correctly?  
There may be an error in registering the fax number when address book des-  
tination and program destination are used.  
Print the list of address book destinations to check that the numbers are reg-  
istered correctly.  
Is there a problem with  
the receiving machine?  
Is the power of the receiving facsimile turned off, is it out of paper or is there  
another problem? Call the recipient or otherwise to determine whether there  
is a problem.  
Reference  
-
Even if the transmission result screen or the result area of an activity report indicates "----", due to a  
problem in an Internet pathway, the E-Mail message may not be delivered to the recipient. "----" dis-  
played in the TX Result or Activity Report indicates that the fax has been successfully sent to the server.  
If the machine receives a message disposition notification (MDN), [OK] appears in the transmission re-  
sult screen or the result column of an activity report. Use G3 Fax to receive important contents.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
12-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
12.2  
Cannot receive faxes  
12  
12.2  
Cannot receive faxes  
When a fax cannot be received, try to correct problems by referring to the table below. If a fax reception error  
persists, please contact your service representative.  
d
Reference  
If you are unable to send a fax, the TX Result Report is output. For details, refer to page 8-12. (When printing  
the TX Result Report is enabled)  
For details on error messages, Refer to page 12-6.  
For problems such as jamming of originals, paper jams, poor image quality or exhausted toner, refer to the  
[User's Guide Copy Operations]  
12.2.1 G3 Fax  
Description of  
problem  
Check points  
Corrective Actions  
Cannot receive  
faxes  
Is paper in the  
machine?  
If the add paper icon is lit, the machine is out of paper and re-  
ceived documents are stored in memory. Add paper.  
For the procedure for adding paper, refer to the [User's Guide  
Copy Operations].  
Is paper jammed  
in the machine?  
In case of a paper jam, received documents are stored in  
memory.  
Remove the jammed paper.  
For the procedure for correcting paper jams, refer to the [Us-  
er's Guide Copy Operations].  
Is the machine  
out of toner?  
No fax can be received if the toner is exhausted.  
Replace the toner cartridge.  
For the procedure for replacing the toner cartridges, refer to  
the [User's Guide Copy Operations].  
Is the Receive  
If [Receive Mode] in the Utility menu is set to [Manual RX], it is  
Mode set to Man- necessary to perform the reception procedure manually. Per-  
ual RX?  
form the manual reception procedure by referring to page 6-3.  
Is the telephone  
Is the telephone line disconnected? Check the telephone cord  
line correctly con- for connection and, if unplugged, plug it securely.  
nected?  
Is [Closed Net-  
work RX] ena-  
bled?  
If [Closed Network RX] is enabled, the machine accepts faxes  
sent from specific recipients. For details, contact your admin-  
istrator.  
Has a wrong SUB  
been sent in F-  
code from the  
sender side?  
If a wrong sub-address is received with the Confidential or Re-  
lay User Box set, a communication error may occur, causing  
failed reception. Check the sender side to see if the sub-ad-  
dress is set.  
No printout pro-  
duced  
Is PC-Fax RX en-  
abled?  
Check the User Box used by the PC-Fax RX function to save  
data.  
Is TSI Distribution  
enabled?  
Check the User Box used by the TSI Distribution function to  
save data.  
Is Memory RX en- If Memory RX is enabled, print the document received by fol-  
abled? lowing the procedure described below.  
Press the [User Box] key.  
Press [System User Box].  
Press [Compulsory Memory RX User Box], and then press  
[Use/File].  
If a password has been configured, enter it and then press  
[OK].  
Select the document you want to print and then press  
[Print].  
Or set [Memory RX Setting] to [No].  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
12-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
12.2  
Cannot receive faxes  
12  
12.2.2 Network Fax  
Description of  
problem  
Check points  
Corrective Actions  
Cannot receive  
faxes  
Is paper in the  
machine?  
If the add paper icon is lit, the machine is out of paper and re-  
ceived documents are stored in memory. Add paper.  
For the procedure for adding paper, refer to the [User's Guide  
Copy Operations].  
Is paper jammed  
in the machine?  
In case of a paper jam, received documents are stored in  
memory. Remove the jammed paper.  
For the procedure for correcting paper jams, refer to the [Us-  
er's Guide Copy Operations].  
Is the machine  
out of toner?  
No fax can be received if the toner is exhausted. Replace the  
toner cartridge.  
For the procedure for replacing the toner cartridges, refer to  
the [User's Guide Copy Operations].  
Is the network ca- Check the network cable for connection and, if disconnected,  
ble correctly con-  
nected?  
connect it securely.  
Is the memory full  
or does the hard  
disk lack suffi-  
cient available  
space?  
Check the remaining amount of memory or hard disk space. If  
there is insufficient memory or hard disk space, the machine  
will fail to receive faxes or, if it receives faxes, will fail to print  
them.  
No printout pro-  
duced  
Is Memory RX en- If Memory RX is enabled, print the document received by fol-  
abled? lowing the procedure described below.  
Press the [User Box] key.  
Press [System User Box].  
Press [Compulsory Memory RX User Box], and then press  
[Use/File].  
If a password has been configured, enter it and then press  
[OK].  
Select the document you want to print and then press  
[Print].  
Optionally, you can change the setting to disable Memory RX.  
For details, refer to page 10-22.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
12-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
12.3  
Error messages displayed  
12  
12.3  
Error messages displayed  
If the machine encounters a problem, an error dialog will appear and display one of the following error mes-  
sages. Take corrective actions by referring to the table below.  
If a communication error persists, please contact your service representative.  
12.3.1 G3 Fax  
Error Message  
Corrective Actions  
[Failed to complete the  
job due to an error while  
dialing.]  
Redial was attempted the number of times specified, however, transmission  
failed because the recipient was busy or due to other reasons.  
Check the recipient's state to resend the fax.  
[Unable to check send-  
er.]  
The machine failed to verify the recipient with Check Dest. & Send set to  
[Yes].  
Check that the receiver's fax number is registered correctly.  
[Not enough memory to  
continue scanning.]  
During scanning of original, the memory became full.  
Press Start to send scanned originals. Press Stop to stop faxing.  
[Transmission failed.  
Please check line con-  
nection.]  
The telephone cord may have become unplugged.  
Check the telephone cord for connection and, if unplugged, plug it securely.  
[Cannot connect to the  
network.]  
Make sure that the network cable is correctly connected. In addition, make  
sure that [Network Settings] in Administrator Settings is correctly configured.  
[The address for the  
communication method  
cannot be selected since  
the number of addresses  
has exceeded the maxi-  
mum allowed for broad-  
casting.]  
The number of destinations specified exceeds the number possible for a  
broadcast transmission. Reduce the number of broadcast destinations, or  
send the transmission in multiple batches.  
[Document could not be  
saved in the User Box  
due to insufficient HDD  
capacity. Check log.]  
Check log The hard disk is full.  
[The number of regis-  
tered user boxes has  
reached the maximum  
allowed.]  
The number of User Boxes that can be registered has reached the maximum  
number possible. Delete unnecessary User Boxes, and then try registering  
new boxes again.  
[This user box has  
reached its maximum  
number of pages al-  
lowed.]  
The number of documents that can be saved in a User Box has reached the  
maximum number possible. Delete unnecessary documents, and then try  
saving the document again.  
[The maximum number  
of jobs has been queued.  
Wait until a queued job is  
completed.]  
The number of jobs that can be programmed has reached the maximum  
number possible. Wait until a job has been completed, or delete a current job.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
12-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
12.3  
Error messages displayed  
12  
12.3.2 If the HDD Ready indicator indicates an HDD malfunction  
Contact your service representative.  
12.3.3 Network Fax Error Code  
If the machine encounters a problem while sending or receiving a network fax, an error dialog will appear and  
error codes will be displayed in Nxx format. Take corrective actions by referring to the table below.  
Transmission system error code  
Code  
Type  
Descrip-  
tion  
Redial ON  
or OFF  
Corrective Actions  
N10  
Connec-  
tion error  
Server con-  
nection er-  
ror  
OFF  
Check the state of the recipient.  
Check the network settings for the ma-  
chine.  
Ask the network administrator to ensure  
that the network is running successfully.  
N11  
N12  
Connec-  
tion error  
Connec-  
tion refused  
OFF  
ON  
Reception refused. Check the state of the  
recipient.  
Connec-  
tion error  
Line dis-  
connected  
Verify that the cables and cords are secure-  
ly connected and that there is no network  
failure.  
N13  
Connec-  
tion error  
No net-  
work re-  
sponse  
OFF  
Check the state of the recipient.  
Check the network settings for the ma-  
chine.  
Ask the network administrator to ensure  
that the network is running successfully.  
N14  
N15  
Connec-  
tion error  
Mail distri-  
OFF  
ON  
Check the recipient's state and then resend  
the fax.  
bution error  
Recipient  
resetting  
Recipient  
connection  
reset  
Check the recipient's state and then resend  
the fax.  
N16  
N17  
N18  
Recipient  
busy  
Recipient  
busy  
ON  
Check the recipient's state and then resend  
the fax.  
LAN con-  
nection  
Connec-  
tion timeout  
OFF  
Check the recipient's state and then resend  
the fax.  
Network er- Network er- OFF  
ror  
Check that the network fax settings are  
correct.  
Verify that the cables and cords are se-  
curely connected and that there is no  
network failure.  
ror  
Turn the main power off and back on  
and then resend the fax.  
N20  
Memory er-  
ror  
Memory er-  
ror  
OFF  
Memory is full.  
Check that there are no other jobs being  
processed.  
Reduce the number of pages to be sent  
or reduce the scanning resolution to re-  
send the fax.  
N21  
N22  
HDD error  
HDD error  
OFF  
OFF  
The hard disk is full.  
Delete unnecessary files.  
Reduce the number of pages to be sent  
or reduce the scanning resolution to re-  
send the fax.  
Conversion  
error  
Conversion  
error  
Turn the main power off and back on and  
then resend the fax.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
12-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
12.3  
Error messages displayed  
12  
Code  
Type  
Descrip-  
tion  
Redial ON  
or OFF  
Corrective Actions  
N25  
Memory  
overflow  
Memory full  
OFF  
Memory is full.  
Check that there are no other jobs being  
processed.  
Reduce the number of pages to be sent  
or reduce the scanning resolution to re-  
send the fax.  
Reception system error code  
Code  
Type  
Descrip-  
tion  
Corrective Actions  
N50  
SMTP re-  
ception  
SMTP re-  
ception er-  
ror  
If SMTP reception does not start 60 minutes later after an  
incoming call was connected, this error occurs.  
Ask the sender to resend the fax.  
N51  
N52  
Decoding  
Decoding  
Original too  
long error  
Ask the sender to shorten the length of original to be sent  
before resending the fax.  
Received  
page too  
long error  
Ask the sender to reduce the number of pages to be sent  
before resending the fax.  
N53  
N54  
Decoding  
Decoding  
File error  
Ask the sender to resend the fax in a correct format shown  
below.  
Internet fax: TIFF  
IP Address Fax: PDF or TIFF  
Decode er-  
ror  
Fax received contains data in an invalid format. Ask the  
sender to resend the fax in a correct format.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
12-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
12.4  
If [Contact your service representative.] is displayed (Service Call)  
12  
12.4  
If [Contact your service representative.] is displayed (Service Call)  
If there is a problem that cannot be remedied by the customer, [Contact your service representative.] appears  
on the screen. (Service Call screen)  
Normally, the phone number and fax number for your service representative appear in the center of the Serv-  
ice Call screen.  
The following is the procedure for notifying your service representative of a problem.  
7 CAUTION  
To prevent the risk of serious accident, perform the following when the service call screen is displayed and  
the facsimile is no longer operable.  
-
-
-
-
Write down the problem code of the message.  
Turn off the Sub Power Switch and Main Power Switch.  
Remove the power cord from the outlet.  
Contact your service representative and inform them of the problem code.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
12-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13.1  
Product specifications  
13  
13 Appendix  
13.1  
Product specifications  
13.1.1 Scanner functions  
Item  
Specifications  
Scan speed  
Scannable range  
Functions  
70 sheets/minute (for 8-1/2 e11 (A4))  
Same as the copier (Max. 11 e17 (A3))  
E-Mail  
FTP  
PC (SMB)  
User Box  
WebDAV  
Web Service  
Scanner resolution  
200/300/400/600 dpi  
Scannable paper size  
11 e17 w, 8-1/2 e14 w, 8-1/2 e11 w/v, 7-1/4 e10-1/2 w/v, 5-1/2 e8-1/2  
w/v, 4 e6 w/v  
A3 wto A5 w/v, A6 w, B4 wto B6 w  
*1  
8 e13 w , 16K w/v, 8K w  
*1  
There are six types of foolscap:8-1/2 e13-1/2 w, 220 mm e330 mmw, 8-  
1/2 e13 w, 8-1/4 e13 w, 8-1/8 e13-1/4 w, and 8 e13 w. Any one of these  
sizes is selectable. For details, contact your service representative.  
Special functions  
Mixed Original, Z-Folded Original, Long Original, Binding Position, Frame  
Erase, Book Copy, Original Direction, Stamp/Composition  
13.1.2 Fax function  
Item  
Specifications  
Image memory capacity  
Number of stored pages  
2,048 MB (standard)  
10,000 pages (when an approx. 700-character original with the 8-1/2 e11  
(A4) size is stored with [Fine] resolution)  
Applicable lines  
Subscribed telephone lines (including facsimile communication networks)  
PBX lines  
Scanning line density  
Ultra Fine:  
600 dpi e600 dpi  
Super Fine:  
16 dot/mm e15.4 line/mm, 400 dpi e400 dpi  
Fine:  
8 dot/mm e7.7 line/mm, 200 dpi e200 dpi  
Normal:  
8 dot/mm e3.85 line/mm  
Faxes are transmitted at any of the above scanning line densities according  
to the capabilities of a recipient's machine.  
Baud rate (G3)  
2400/4800/7200/9600/12000/14400/16800/19200/21600/24000/26400/  
28800/31200/33600 bps  
Maximum scanning size  
Original glass:  
17 e11-11/16 inches (431.8 e297 mm) (11 e17 (A3) size)  
ADF:  
11-11/16 e39-3/8 inches (297 mm e1000 mm) (Standard/Fine/Super Fine)  
11-11/16 e17 inches (297 mm e432 mm) (Standard/Fine/Super Fine)  
Maximum recording size  
16-9/16 e11-11/16 inches (420 x 297 mm) (11 e17 (A3) size)  
You cannot receive originals in excess of 39-3/8 inches (1000 mm) in size.  
When originals longer than the paper size in trays have been received, print-  
ing is made based on the settings of the Page Separation setting.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
13-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
13.2  
Tips  
13  
13.2  
Tips  
13.2.1 Number of pages saved in memory  
This machine contains the 250 GB hard disk in the standard.  
In the hard disk, it is possible to store about 10,000 our standard originals in an A4 size sheet with 700 words  
that are saved and received in each mode (Copy, Printer, Scan, User Box and Fax) (with the resolution set to  
[Fine]).  
Reference  
-
Memory overflow may occur when the original document is being read. In this case, Allows you to either  
transmit the part of the original that has been read, or redo the procedure from the beginning.  
13.2.2 Telling the machine to make a scan through a computer (Web service)  
You can tell the machine to scan originals through a computer and receive scanned data.  
The following is an example of procedure for scanning originals via Windows Photo Gallery.  
Reference  
-
-
For the settings you must configure in advance, refer to page 4-6.  
You can also tell the machine to scan originals to save them. For the detailed procedure, refer to  
Telling the machine to make a scan through a computer  
1
2
Start a scanner enabled application.  
On the [File] menu, click [Import from Camera or Scanner].  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
13-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
13.2  
Tips  
13  
3
From the list of [Scanners and Cameras], select this machine and then click [Import].  
The [New Scan] dialog box appears.  
Load the original on the machine.  
4
5
Configure scan settings and then click [Scan].  
6
In the [Tag these images] list, enter the file name and then click [Import].  
The original is scanned and the scanned data is added to the list of images.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
13-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13.3  
Scanner Glossary  
13  
13.3  
Scanner Glossary  
Term  
Description  
A set of specifications under the Ethernet standards. Those cables that consist of  
10Base-T/  
100Base-TX/  
1000Base-T  
twisted copper wire pairs are used. The transmission speed of 10Base-T is 10  
Mbps, of 100Base-TX is 100 Mbps, and of 1000Base-T is 1000 Mbps.  
Active Directory  
A network service provided by Microsoft. Active Directory can centrally manage  
all types of information including servers, clients, printers and other hardware re-  
sources, as well as properties and access permissions of users on the network.  
®
®
Adobe Flash  
Software or its file format developed by Adobe Systems Inc. (formerly by Macro-  
media, Inc.), used to create a content by compiling vector-graphic animations  
and sounds. The software allows handling interactive contents using keyboard or  
mouse. The files can be kept relatively compact and accessed from a Web  
browser with dedicated plug-in software.  
Anonymous FTP  
APOP  
While normal FTP sites are protected by an account name and password, this  
type of FTP site can be used by anyone without a password by simply entering  
anonymous as the account name.  
The acronym for Authenticated Post Office Protocol. While usual POP does not  
encrypt the password used for receiving an E-mail, APOP encrypts the password.  
This authentication method helps enhance the E-mail security.  
AppleTalk  
Auto IP  
bit  
The generic name for the protocol suite developed by Apple Computer for com-  
puter networking.  
A function to obtain an IP address automatically. If one fails to get an IP address  
via DHCP, the auto IP gets an IP address from the space of "169.254.0.0".  
The abbreviation for binary digit. The smallest unit of information (data quantity)  
handled by a computer or printer. A bit uses only a 0 or a 1 to indicate data.  
BMP  
The abbreviation for bitmap. This is a file format for saving image data. (The file  
extension is ".bmp"). Commonly used on Windows platforms. BMP covers the  
color depth from monochrome (2 values) to full color (16,777,216 colors). BMP  
images are not suitable for compressed storage.  
Bonjour  
Byte  
A Macintosh network technology, automatically detecting a device connected to  
the network for automatic configuration. Previously called "Rendezvous", and  
has been changed to "Bonjour" since Mac OS X v10.4.  
A byte indicates a unit of information (data quantity) handled by a computer or  
printer. A byte consists of eight bits.  
Client  
A computer using services provided by servers via the network.  
Compact PDF  
A compression method for minimizing the data size using the PDF format, used  
for digitalizing color documents.  
Compact PDF allows high compression performance by identifying the text and  
image regions, and applying the resolution and compression method optimized  
for each region.  
The compact PDF method can be selected in this machine when using the scan-  
ning function to digitalize documents.  
Contrast  
CSV  
The difference in intensity between the light and dark parts of the image  
(light/dark variation). "Low contrast" indicates an image with little light/dark vari-  
ation, while "High contrast" an image with large light/dark variation.  
The acronym for Comma Separated Values, which is one of the formats used for  
saving database or spreadsheet data as a text file. (The file extension is ".csv".)  
Data can be shared among different applications by being separated by commas  
(as the delimiter).  
Default  
An initial setting. The settings selected in advance and enabled when the machine  
is turned on, or the settings selected in advance and enabled when the function  
is activated.  
Default Gateway  
Density  
A device, such as a computer or router, used as a "gateway" to access comput-  
ers on different LANs.  
The amount of density of an image.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
13-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
13.3  
Scanner Glossary  
13  
Term  
Description  
DHCP  
The acronym for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. used for a client compu-  
ter on the TCP/IP network to load network configuration automatically from a  
server. Just using a DHCP server to centrally manage IP addresses of the DHCP  
clients enables you to construct a network without IP address conflicts or other  
troubles.  
DNS  
The acronym for Domain Name System. DNS allows for obtaining the IP address  
corresponding to a host name in network environments. This system enables a  
user to access other computers on the network by specifying host names instead  
of elusive and non-intuitive IP addresses.  
DPI (dpi)  
Driver  
The acronym for Dots Per Inch. A unit of resolution used for printers and scan-  
ners. This indicates the number of dots used to represent an inch. The higher this  
value, the higher the resolution.  
Software that works as a bridge between a computer and a peripheral device.  
Dynamic authentica- An authentication method option used when connecting to a LDAP server from a  
tion (LDAP setting)  
multifunctional product. Select this option if you want an user to enter the login  
name and password each time the user logs on the LDAP server to refer to des-  
tination information.  
Ethernet  
A standard for LAN transmission lines.  
File extension  
Characters added to a file name for the recognition of the file format. The file ex-  
tension is added after a dot of a file name, for example, ".bmp" or ".jpg".  
FTP  
The acronym for File Transfer Protocol. This is a protocol used for transferring  
files via the Internet, an intranet or other TCP/IP network.  
Gateway  
Hardware and software used as the point where a network is connected to a net-  
work. A gateway not only connects networks but also changes data formats, ad-  
dresses, and protocols according to the connected networks.  
Gradation  
Gray scale  
The shading levels of an image. Larger number of the levels can reproduce  
smoother transition of the shading.  
A form of presenting monochrome image by using the gradation information shift-  
ing from black to white.  
GSS-SPNEGO/  
Simple/Digest MD5  
Authentication methods used for logging in to the LDAP server. The different au-  
thentication method, GSS-SPENEGO, SIMPLE or Digest MD5 is used for a LDAP  
server depending on the type of the server being used or server settings.  
Halftone  
A method for presenting the shading of an image by using different sizes of black  
and white dots  
Hard disk  
A large capacity storage device for storing data. The data is retained even after  
the power is turned off.  
Host name  
HTTP  
The name used to identify a device on a network.  
The acronym for HyperText Transfer Protocol. This is a protocol used to send or  
receive data between a Web server and a client (such as a Web browser). HTTP  
can exchange files such as images, sounds, and movies that are associated with  
documents, including their presentation formats and other information.  
ICM  
The acronym for Image Color Management, a color management system used for  
Windows. ICM adjusts the difference of a color caused by different I/O devices,  
such as monitors, scanners and printers, and reproduce the color mostly com-  
mon to any those devices.  
IMAP  
The acronym for Internet Message Access Protocol. The protocol for retrieving E-  
mail messages with the function for managing mailboxes on the server. Currently,  
IMAP4 (the fourth version of IMAP) is most often used.  
Install  
To install hardware, operating systems, applications, printer drivers, or other soft-  
ware on to a computer.  
IP Address  
An address or a code used to identify an individual network device on the Inter-  
net. A maximum of three digits for four numbers are displayed such as  
192.168.1.10. The IP address is assigned to every computer or other device con-  
nected to the Internet.  
IPP  
The acronym for Internet Printing Protocol. which is used to send or receive print  
data or control printers via the Internet or other TCP/IP network. IPP can also  
send and print data to printers in remote areas via the Internet.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
13-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13.3  
Scanner Glossary  
13  
Term  
Description  
IPsec  
The name of a security technology used for the TCP/IP network. IPsec allows  
service with enhanced security by determining the protocol used for the encryp-  
tion of transmit packets and for authentication.  
IPv6  
The acronym for Internet Protocol version 6. With the number of devices on the  
Internet increasing, the IPv6 protocol has been arranged to replace the current  
IPv4 protocol. 128-bit IP addressing system and expanded security features.  
IPX  
One of the protocols used for NetWare. IPX runs in the network layer of the OSI  
reference model.  
Java  
A programming language developed by Sun Microsystems that runs on most  
computers regardless of the installed hardware and operating system. However,  
in order to run Java applications, an operating environment called Java Virtual  
Machine (Java VM) is required.  
Kerberos  
A network authentication system used for Windows 2000 or later, used as the Ac-  
tive Directory authentication. Kerberos arranges an authentic site within the net-  
work to provide two-phase authentication processes of users login and the use  
of network resources, allowing users to be securely and efficiently authenticated.  
LAN  
The acronym for Local Area Network. This is a network constructed by connect-  
ing computers on the same floor, in the same building, or in neighboring build-  
ings.  
LDAP  
LPD  
The acronym for Lightweight Directory Access Protocol, a protocol used to ac-  
cess a database that can manage E-mail addresses and environmental informa-  
tion of network users on the Internet, intranet, or other TCP/IP network.  
The acronym for Line Printer Daemon. This is a platform-independent printer pro-  
tocol running on the TCP/IP network. The protocol was originally developed for  
BSD UNIX, and has become one of the printing protocols typically used among  
general computers.  
LPR/LPD  
The acronym for Line Printer Request/Line Printer Daemon. This is a printing  
method implemented via networks, used for Windows NT or UNIX based sys-  
tems. It uses TCP/IP to output printing data from Windows or UNIX to a printer  
on the network.  
MAC address  
MAC is the acronym for Media Access Control. A MAC address is an ID number  
unique to each Ethernet card, enabling sending or receiving data to or from other  
Ethernet cards. A Mac address consists of 48-bit numbers.The first 24 bits are  
controlled by IEEE and used to allocate a unique number to each manufacture,  
whereas the latter 24 bits are used by each manufacturer to assign a unique  
number to each card.  
Memory  
MH  
A storage device used for storing data temporarily. Some types of memory retain  
data even after the power is turned off, while others not.  
The acronym for Modified Huffman, which is a data compression encoding meth-  
od used for fax transmissions. Text-based originals are compressed to approxi-  
mately 1/10 the original size.  
MIB  
The acronym for Management Information Base, which defines the format of  
management information for network devices that are collected using SNMP in  
TCP/IP communication. Two types of MIB are provided, that is, the private MIB  
specific to each manufacturer and the standardized MIB.  
MMR  
The acronym for Modified Modified Read, which is a data compression encoding  
method used for fax transmissions. Text-based originals are compressed to ap-  
proximately 1/20 the original size.  
NetBEUI  
The abbreviation for NetBIOS Extended User Interface. This is a network protocol  
developed by IBM. NetBEUI enables you to construct a small-scale network sim-  
ply by configuring computer names.  
NetWare  
NTLM  
A network operating system developed by Novell. This uses NetWare IPX/SPX for  
the communication protocol.  
The acronym for NT LAN Manager, which is a user authentication method used  
for Windows NT or later. NTLM encodes password using MD4 or MD5 encoding  
method.  
NTP  
The acronym for Network Time Protocol, a protocol used to adjust the compu-  
ter's internal clock precisely via the network. In a hierarchical method, the time is  
adjusted with the server at the highest level using GPS to acquire the correct  
time, which is then referenced by each lower level host.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
13-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13.3  
Scanner Glossary  
13  
Term  
Description  
OCR  
The acronym for Optical Character Reader, a device or software that converts  
handwritten or printed characters to text data by optically scanning them and  
comparing them with previously stored patterns for identification.  
OS  
The acronym for Operating System. This is base software used to control the sys-  
tem of a computer. Windows, MacOS, or UNIX is an OS.  
PASV  
The abbreviation for PASsiVe, a mode used to connect to an FTP server from  
within a firewall. If this mode is not selected, the firewall regards the access as  
unauthorized and blocks the connection, disabling any file transmission.  
PDF  
The acronym for Portable Document Format. This is an electronically formatted  
document with file extension of ".pdf". PDF is a PostScript based format, and can  
be viewed using Adobe Acrobat Reader, a free viewer software.  
Peer-to-peer  
Pixel  
A type of network where the connected devices can be communicate with each  
other without using a dedicated server.  
The smallest constitutional unit of an image.  
Pixel indicates an image pixel, the smallest constitutional unit of an image.  
POP  
The acronym for Post Office Protocol. A protocol for retrieving E-mail messages  
from a mail server. Currently, POP3 (the third version of POP) is most often used.  
POP Before SMTP  
A user authentication method used when sending E-mail messages. POP Before  
SMTP receives E-mail messages first, then authenticates the user using the POP  
server. The IP address, passed through the user authentication by the POP serv-  
er, is then permitted to use the SMTP server. This method prevents third parties  
without permission to use the mail server from sending mail messages.  
Port Number  
Preview  
A number used to identify the transmission port assigned to each process run-  
ning on a computer on the network. The same port cannot be used by multiple  
processes.  
A function allowing you to view an image before being processed for printing or  
scanning.  
Printer driver  
Property  
Software that works as a bridge between a computer and a printer.  
Attribute information. When using a printer driver, various functions can be spec-  
ified in the file properties. By using properties of a file, you can check the attribute  
information about the file.  
Protocol  
A rule enabling a computer to communicate with other computers or peripherals.  
Proxy server  
A server that is installed to act as an intermediary connection between each client  
and different servers to effectively ensure security over the entire system for In-  
ternet connections  
RAW port number  
realm (IPP setting)  
A TCP port number used when the RAW protocol is selected for Windows or oth-  
er TCP printing. The RAW port number is usually set to 9100.  
An area used for allowing security functions. The area is used to organize user  
names, passwords and other authentication information, and define the security  
policy in the area.  
Referral setting  
(LDAP setting)  
If there is no relevant destination data found on an LDAP server, the LDAP server  
itself instructs which LDAP server to be searched for the next. The referral setting  
configures whether the multifunctional product is responsible for searching the  
next LDAP server.  
Resolution  
S/MIME  
The resolution value indicates how much detail of an object can be reproduced  
precisely on an image or a print matter.  
The acronym for Secure/Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions,  
which is a protocol used to add encryption, digital signature, and other features  
to MIME (E-mail operations).  
Public key method is used for encryption, using a different key for encryption and  
decryption.  
Samba  
UNIX server software which uses SMB (Server Message Block) to make UNIX  
system resources available to Windows environments.  
Scanning  
The reading of an image in scanner operation by moving aligned image sensors  
step by step. The direction of moving image sensors is called the main scanning  
direction, and the direction of image sensors alignment is called the sub-scan-  
ning direction.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
13-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13.3  
Scanner Glossary  
Term  
13  
Description  
Screen frequency  
The density of dots used to create the image.  
A TIFF file that contains only a single page.  
Single-page TIFF  
SLP  
The acronym for Service Location Protocol. Services on a TCP/IP network and  
clients are automatically searched for.  
SMB  
The acronym for Server Message Block. This is a protocol for sharing files and  
printers mainly over the Windows network.  
SMTP  
The acronym for Simple Mail Transfer Protocol. a protocol used to transmit/trans-  
fer E-mails.  
SNMP  
The acronym for Simple Network Management Protocol. This is a management  
protocol in the TCP/IP network environments.  
SSL/TLS  
Subnet mask  
The acronym for Secure Socket Layer/Transport Layer Security, an encoding  
method used to securely transmit data between the Web server and a browser.  
A value used to divide a TCP/IP network into small networks (subnetworks). This  
is used to identify how many higher-order bits of an IP address are used for the  
network address.  
TCP Socket  
TCP/IP  
TCP Socket indicates an API used for the TCP/IP network. This socket is used to  
open a transmission route for input or output of usual files.  
The acronym for Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. It is a de facto  
standard protocol widely used for the Internet. An IP address is used to identify  
each network device.  
Thumbnail  
TIFF  
A function of displaying the content of an image or document file by a small image  
(image displayed when the file is opened).  
The acronym for Tagged Image File Format, One of the file formats used for sav-  
ing image data. (The file extension is ".tif"). By using the "tag" indicating the data  
type, information for various image formats can be saved in a single image data.  
TWAIN  
An interface standard defined for between imaging devices including scanners  
and digital cameras and applications including graphics software. To use a  
TWAIN compatible device, a corresponding TWAIN driver is required.  
Uninstallation  
USB  
To delete software installed on a computer.  
The acronym for Universal Serial Bus. This is a general-purpose interface defined  
for connecting a mouse, printer, and other devices with a computer.  
Web browser  
WINS  
Software used to view Web pages. Typical Web browsers include Internet Explor-  
er and Netscape Navigator.  
The acronym for Windows Internet Naming Service. This is a service, available in  
Windows environments, to call the name server responsible for conversion be-  
tween a computer name and an IP address.  
Zone  
A name used for an AppleTalk network. Zone is used to group multiple devices  
on the AppleTalk network.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
13-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13.4  
Internet Fax Glossary  
13  
13.4  
Internet Fax Glossary  
This section describes the general terms used in the Internet fax communications.  
Term  
Description  
DSN  
The acronym for Delivery Status Notifications, a delivery status notification mes-  
sage being returned from a receiver to a sender when the E-mail is delivered to  
the receiver's mail server.  
Internet Fax  
MDN  
A transmission method by which the scanned original data is transmitted among  
Internet fax machines and computers as TIFF format E-mail attachments via the  
intranet (in-house network) and the Internet.  
The acronym for Message Disposition Notifications, a message sent to confirm  
that the mail has been unsealed, a response to a sender when the sender re-  
quests for doing so.  
POP3  
The acronym for Post Office Protocol - Version 3, a commonly used transmission  
protocol (transmission convention) for the transmission and reception of E-mail.  
POP3 has functions including mail box authentication, E-mail download, list in-  
formation check, and E-mail deletion.  
SMTP  
The acronym for Simple Mail Transfer Protocol, a commonly used transmission  
protocol (transmission convention) for the transmission and reception of E-mail.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
13-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
13.5  
Fax Glossary  
13  
13.5  
Fax Glossary  
This section describes the general terms used in the fax communications.  
Explanations may be given of the terms of functions that are not included in this machine.  
Term  
Description  
Address Book  
A function of registering frequently used fax numbers of recipients. When regis-  
tering abbreviated addresses, you should also register the destination name and  
the search string, so that you can specify the destination using the search string  
to select.  
Background Remov- A function to adjust the shading of background color before sending the docu-  
al  
ment.  
Batch transmission  
A function to send documents as one document at a specified time if the docu-  
ments have the same transmission conditions such as destination, transmission  
time, memory transmission or resolution, and are stored in the same memory.  
Baudrate  
Baudrate indicates, for the fax, the transmission rate of a modem.  
This machine can communicate at a high transmission rate of 33,600bps. When  
selecting overseas communication mode, the machine communicates at  
7200bps or 4800bps, a rate suitable for noise-resistance.  
Binding Position  
A function to specify the binding position of a double-sided document when it is  
sent using ADF. Two types of binding positions are available for a double-sided  
document: One is the top and bottom binding with the binding position at the top  
or bottom of the document. The other is left and right binding with the binding po-  
sition at the left or right of the document. Note that the second side of the docu-  
ment has a different top or bottom relation.  
Book Copy  
bps  
A function of, when sending a fax of a book or catalog, separating the front cover,  
back cover, right pages, and left pages into individual pages.  
The acronym for bit per second, which is a unit of data transmission, indicating  
the amount of data transmitted per second.  
Broadcast  
A transmission of a single document to many recipients in one operation.  
Bulletin board  
A function of posting documents to be viewed, or stores the documents to be  
transmitted via polling.  
Check Dest. & Send  
A function to send a fax after comparing the specified fax number with the fax  
number information of the recipient (CSI). Only when those numbers match, the  
function sends the fax. If the numbers are not matched, a transmission error oc-  
curs.Therefore, this prevents misdirected transmissions. The sender's fax  
number must be correctly registered with recipient's machine.  
Closed Network RX  
A function to accept only transmissions from recipient machines with a matching  
password.  
Confidential com-  
munication  
A function to transmit a document to specific persons you want them to read it.  
Documents sent via confidential communication are not printed when received,  
and are saved in a confidential box of the recipient's fax machine. The document  
can be printed by some specific operation such as entering the access code for  
the confidential box.  
Default value  
A setting value configured for the machine prior to shipment from the factory.  
Some default values can be changed by using the settings menu. It is convenient  
to set a frequently used value to the default value according to your application.  
Dialing Method  
ECM  
Three types are provided for Dialing methods: PB (push-button dialing), 10PPS  
(pulse dialing/ 10 pps), and 20PPS (pulse dialing/ 20 pps).  
(Error Correction Mode)  
ECM is the error resending method used for G3 communication. ECM checks  
whether the data is correctly sent to the destination, and should it be not the case,  
ECM resends the same data while maintains the serial communication. If a re-  
ceiver also provides the ECM mode, this machine uses the ECM-based commu-  
nication with the receiver unless the ECM mode is disabled.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
13-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
13.5  
Fax Glossary  
13  
Term  
Description  
F-Code  
A communication procedure related to the usage of subaddress of T.30* stand-  
ardized by CIAJ (Communications and Information Network Association of Ja-  
pan). F code is provided by Japanese Communications Industrial Corporation.  
Various kinds of capabilities are available for the communication among fax ma-  
chines with the F code function irrespective of difference of the fax machine  
brand. This machine uses F code for the bulletin boards, relay request, confiden-  
tial communication, and password transmission. (* a communication standard)  
Frame Erase  
A function of erasing dark shadow around the document before transmitting it via  
fax, when scanning a booklet form document or a document with ADF kept open.  
G3  
A fax communication mode standardized by the ITU-T (International Telecommu-  
nication Union). G3 and G4 are provided for the communication modes. Today,  
G3 is more widely used than G4.  
Group  
LDAP  
The grouping of multiple abbreviation numbers. It is convenient to use the group  
when a volume of sequential broadcast transmissions or sequential pollings are  
distributed to the same destination addresses.  
The acronym for Lightweight Directory Access Protocol, a protocol used to ac-  
cess a database that can manage E-mail addresses and environmental informa-  
tion of network users on the Internet, intranet, or other TCP/IP network.  
Long Original  
A function to send original pages longer than A3 size (16-9/16 inches (420 mm)).  
Long originals can be sent by selecting this function.  
Main Scanning  
The operation of scanning a document optically, and converting the document  
into image data.  
Main scanning di-  
rection  
The horizontal direction for scanning documents.  
Manual transmission  
Memory  
An operation to send a fax while checking the status of the receiver.  
A location where information is stored temporarily. It is used to instruct the ma-  
chine to send faxes or to save temporarily stored documents.  
Memory overflow  
Memory RX  
A condition where the fax memory becomes full while scanned documents or  
temporarily stored documents are saved.  
A function of storing received documents in memory, and printing them if re-  
quired.  
Memory TX  
A method to start a fax transmission after scanning documents and storing them  
in memory. If memory transmission is used, the total number of pages are auto-  
matically printed in the page number of the transmission source information and  
an image of the first page of the sent document is printed in the transmission re-  
port. However, the memory may become full if the document contains many pag-  
es, or a large volume of information because of the fine and minute image.  
Mixed Original  
A function of setting different sizes of documents, detecting the size of each doc-  
ument, and send them accordingly.  
n-memory proxy re-  
ception  
A function of saving received documents automatically to memory when the ma-  
chine is unable to print the documents for some reason such as running out of  
paper. When a proper action is taken such as refilling of paper, the temporarily  
saved document is printed out.  
Number of Originals  
A function used for quick memory transmission with information of the total  
number of pages. This allows the recipient to check whether the all pages were  
received or not (In case of memory transmission, the total no. of pages are auto-  
matically added).  
Overseas communi-  
cation  
This is a function to communicate with an overseas recipient. If an overseas com-  
munication mode is set, the fax is sent with a lower speed. Specifying an over-  
seas transmission mode ensures the fax transmission when faxing to the location  
where transmission conditions are poor, even within the country.  
Password TX  
Pause  
The function of sending a fax with a password. If the recipient's fax machine is  
set to closed network reception, the sender's fax machine should transmit the  
same password as used for the closed network reception.  
A temporary break in dialing. In this machine, each pause creates a one second  
break during dialing.  
PB  
A push telephone line.  
PC-FAX  
A function to send a fax directly from a computer without using paper.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
13-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13.5  
Fax Glossary  
13  
Term  
Description  
Polling  
A function available on the receiver's side to request a sender to send documents  
set or stored in the sender's machine or memory.  
Program  
A function of registering frequently used destination fax numbers, or stereotyped  
transmission operation procedures. By simply pressing Mode Memory, you can  
specify the destination, or configure a function automatically to start communica-  
tion.  
Quick Memory TX  
A method to start sending fax immediately after scanning a page of the docu-  
ment. This method allows even a document with many pages to be sent without  
overflowing memory.  
Receiving  
Redial  
A fax machine status where it receives a call.  
A function of dialing a fax number again, when recipient's line is busy, after wait-  
ing for a specified length of time. Both manual redial and automatic redial func-  
tions are available to select.  
Reference Allowed  
Level  
A feature for specifying settings so that only certain people are able to view cer-  
tain destination information for the security of the information. When synchro-  
nized with user authentication, only information with an access permission level  
matching that specified for the user can be viewed.  
Relay broadcast  
A function to broadcast fax messages via other fax machine (called a relay distri-  
bution station). When you have multiple broadcast destinations in remote place,  
you may configure one of the destinations as a relay station to transfer the broad-  
cast via the relay station, so that you can reduce the total communication rate.  
Relay distribution  
station  
A fax machine that sends faxes to relaying destinations upon request for relay is-  
sued from a relay instruction station.  
Relay instruction  
station  
A fax machine sending a relay broadcast request.  
Resending  
Resolution  
Scan Size  
A function of selecting and resending the document that was previously failed to  
send and stored in the memory. The document can be resent either to the same  
destination or to the other destination.  
The granularity for scanning documents. The larger the value of resolution, the  
finer the image quality is, consequently, it takes longer to transmit (transmission  
time). Select the level of resolution according to your requirements.  
A function to specify the scanning size of a document to transmit it. If the width  
of the paper in the recipient's fax machine is smaller than that of the transmitted  
document, the document is usually reduced for printing. If you do not want to re-  
duce the document size, specify the same document size as that of the paper in  
the recipient's fax machine, so that you can send the document with its original  
size.  
Sender Fax No.  
Sender Name  
Sending  
An identification code used for the mutual recognition for fax transmission. Usu-  
ally the fax number is registered for the fax ID.  
The name of a sender. On the receiver's side, the name is printed as a part of the  
sender's information at the edge of the transmitted document.  
Sending indicates making a call. For fax, sending indicates sending documents  
or dialing for pollings.  
Sharpness  
A function to enhance the edge of characters before sending the document.  
The vertical direction for scanning documents.  
Sub-scanning direc-  
tion  
Super G3 (SG3)  
A G3 communication mode complying with ITU-T V.34. Compared with usual G3  
communication, it allows the higher rate transmission (up to 33,600bps).  
Temporary forward  
transmission  
A function of manually forwarding the received document that is standby for out-  
put, by using the setting check button on the control panel. The function must be  
set while the fax/scan screen is displayed, or the operation is halted because of  
paper misfeed or running out of paper.  
Timer TX  
A function of transmitting a fax at the specified time. It is used to save cost by  
transmitting faxes late evening or early morning when discount telephone service  
is available.  
Transmission reser-  
vation  
A function of programming the next transmission during transmission or printing.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
13-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13.5  
Fax Glossary  
Term  
13  
Description  
Transmissionsource  
record  
The transmission time, name, telephone number, page number, and other infor-  
mation on the sender's side printed at the edge of the document on the receiver's  
side.  
Transmission time  
The time needed to send a fax. The higher the resolution or larger the paper, the  
longer the transmission takes.  
TSI  
The acronym for Transmitting Subscriber Identification, which is the ID of a fax  
transmission terminal.  
V34  
A communication mode used for super G3 fax transmission. Super G3 mode  
transmission may not be activated because of a telephone line status where the  
receiver's or sender's machine is connected to a telephone line via a private  
branch exchange switchboard. If this occurs, the G3 mode should be disabled by  
turning V34 off.  
Z-Folded Original  
This function first determines the document size that cannot be detected correct-  
ly because of folds, then scans and sends the document after the verification.  
This function is available only when a document is scanned by ADF.  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
13-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14.1  
Index by item  
14  
14 Index  
14.1  
Index by item  
Contact your service representative .........................12-9  
A
Create user box  
Address search (LDAP)  
D
An address polling RX reserved report .....................8-18  
Auto RX (Dedicated for fax line) ..................................6-2  
B
E
E-mail address  
Enter new address  
C
Check job - check job settings .................................3-15  
Environment and device requirements .......................4-2  
Color/grayscale multi-value compression  
Communication method settings ..............................5-62  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
14-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
14.1  
Index by item  
14  
F
M
Manual RX (Dedicated telephone line) ........................6-3  
N
G
Notes on use  
H
Number of pages saved in memory ..........................13-3  
O
How to access  
One-touch/user box registration .................................9-7  
PageScope Web Connection ..............................11-2  
I
Internet fax advanced settings ................................10-39  
Operating environment  
PageScope Web Connection ..............................11-2  
Original direction setting display .............................10-11  
P
Page configuration  
PageScope Web Connection ............................11-16  
J
L
Limiting access to destinations -  
apply levels/groups to destinations ..........................9-22  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
14-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14.1  
Index by item  
14  
Preview - view pages - change setting .....................5-11  
Print e-mail message body ...........................8-22, 10-36  
Print/fax output setting - fax ...................................10-13  
Sending  
Sequence polling RX reserved report .......................8-18  
Sequential polling RX report .....................................8-16  
Stamp settings - fax TX settings .............................10-14  
Q
R
Receiving e-mails automatically ..................................6-4  
Registering a scan/fax program ................................9-20  
Registering an e-mail setting text .............................9-19  
Registering e-mail setting subjects ...........................9-19  
Reservation communication report ...........................8-17  
Reservation polling TX report ....................................8-17  
Restrict access to job settings ..................................10-8  
T
Total # of pages (quick memory TX) .........................5-56  
U
User authentication/account track ..........................11-25  
V
W
Z
S
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
14-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14.2  
Index by button  
14  
14.2  
Index by button  
Check URL Notif. Destination ...................................9-21  
Numerics  
A
Action when TSI User Box is not set. ......................10-26  
Add ContentType Information .................................10-39  
Apply Levels/Groups to Destinations ........................9-22  
Color/Grayscale Multi-Value Compression Method  
..................................................................................10-37  
Communication Method Settings .............................5-62  
Communication Settings .............3-16, 5-19, 5-58, 9-21  
Compact PDF/XPS Compression Level ...................9-27  
B
D
Destination Check Display Function .......................10-21  
Destination Machine Type ..............................5-27, 9-17  
C
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
14-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
14.2  
Index by button  
14  
H
Header Settings, Footer Settings ............................10-10  
E
I
Incorrect User Box No. Entry ..................................10-19  
Internet Fax Advanced Settings ..............................10-39  
Internet Fax Self RX Ability .....................................10-38  
F
J
L
M
MDN/DSN Response Monitoring Time ...................10-39  
G
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
14-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14.2  
Index by button  
14  
N
Network Fax RX Error Report ..................................10-35  
O
Q
One-Touch/User Box Registration ..............................9-7  
Original Direction Confirmation Screen ...................10-11  
R
Receiving User Box Destination .............................10-25  
Registering and Changing Addresses ......................10-8  
Restrict Access to Job Settings ................................10-8  
P
S
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
14-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14.2  
Index by button  
14  
V
W
X
Z
T
Timer Reservation TX Report ..................................10-27  
Total # of Pages (Quick Memory TX) .........................5-56  
U
Uppercase and Lowercase Letters ...........................9-26  
bizhub C360/C280/C220  
14-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
http://konicaminolta.com  
Copyright  
A0ED-9565NS-11  
2009.10  
2009  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Insignia Digital Camera HCC334L User Manual
Intellinet Network Solutions Network Router 524445 User Manual
JVC Home Theater System TH M45 User Manual
JVC Music Mixer KM H2500 User Manual
Jwin CD Player JX CD900 User Manual
Kenwood Car Speaker KFC 411G User Manual
Kenwood Stereo System VR 8070 User Manual
KitchenAid Coffeemaker KCM1203 User Manual
KitchenAid Ventilation Hood KCMS2255 User Manual
Kobe Range Hoods Ventilation Hood CH0130SQB User Manual